the state technical college of missouri informational technology … · 2019-11-19 · the state...

PROJECT MANUAL FOR: The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn, MO

Prepared by: Architect:

PWArchitects, Inc. 2120 Forum Blvd, Ste. 101 Columbia, Missouri 65203 MEP Engineering (Main Project Contact): Timberlake Engineering 912 Old Highway 63 South Columbia, Missouri 65201 p: (573) 875-4365 [email protected]

Project No.: 15297

November 8, 2019

mailto:[email protected]

Project Title

TE#

CERTIFICATION PAGE

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn, Missouri

15297

The following drawings and specifications have been prepared by me or under my direct supervision:

Drawings:

ARCHITECTURE

NO DRAWINGS

01 10 00 01 20 00 01 30 00 01 32 16 01 40 00 01 50 00 01 60 00 01 70 00 01 78 00

Specifications:

Summary Price and Payment Procedures Administrative Requirements Construction Progress Schedule Quality Requirements Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution and Closeout Requirements Closeout Submittals

Name and license: J. Christopher Davis #A-7512 AS THE PROFESSIONAL WHOSE SIGNATURE AND PERSONAL SEAL APPEAR HEREWITH, I AFFIRM THAT THESE DOCUMENTS LISTED ABOVE WERE PREPARED BY ME, OR UNDER MY SUPERVISION, AND DISCLAIM (PURSUANT TO SECTION 327.411 RSMO) ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL OTHER PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, ESTIMATES, REPORTS, OR OTHER DOCUMENTS OR INSTRUMENTS NOT SEALED BY ME AND WHICH RELATE TO OR ARE INTENDED TO BE USED FOR ANY PART OR PARTS OF THE PROJECT. THIS STATEMENT APPLIES TO ALL DOCUMENTS LISTED ABOVE AND ANY ADDENDA ISSUED TO THE ABOVE.

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution

TE#15297 00 01 01 /1 CERTIFICATION- ARCHITECTURAL

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 000101 / 2 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CERTIFICATION - MEP

CERTIFICATION PAGE Project Title The State Technical College of Missouri Dr. Donald Claycomb Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn, Missouri TE # 15297

The following drawings and specifications have been prepared by me or under my direct supervision:

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING

Drawings

MEP1 MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL-

PLUMBING COVER SHEET M100 MECHANICAL – ELECTRICAL PLAN MD100 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL

DETAILS

Specifications

220523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment 221116 Domestic Water Piping 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping 230518 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 230523.12 Ball Valves for HVAC Piping 230523.14 Check Valves for HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping

and Equipment

Specifications (Continued)

230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

230923.11 Control Valves 232113 Hydronic Piping 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232300 Refrigerant Piping 235700 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 236514.16 Closed-Circuit, Induced-Draft,

Counterflow Cooling Towers 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical

Systems 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 262416 Panelboards 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262913.03 Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers 265119 LED Interior Lighting

Name and license: Mark Timberlake, PE #E-22105

AS THE PROFESSIONAL WHOSE SIGNATURE AND PERSONAL SEAL APPEAR HEREWITH, I AFFIRM THAT THESE DOCUMENTS LISTED ABOVE WERE PREPARED BY ME, OR UNDER MY SUPERVISION, AND DISCLAIM (PURSUANT TO SECTION 327.411 RSMO) ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL OTHER PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, ESTIMATES, REPORTS, OR OTHER DOCUMENTS OR INSTRUMENTS NOT SEALED BY ME AND WHICH RELATE TO OR ARE INTENDED TO BE USED FOR ANY PART OR PARTS OF THE PROJECT. THIS STATEMENT APPLIES TO ALL DOCUMENTS LISTED ABOVE AND ANY ADDENDA ISSUED TO THE ABOVE.

Mark

MO

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 00 01 10 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The State Technical College of Missouri

Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution

Linn, Missouri Project No.: TE 15297

DIVISION 00 -- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING, AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 ........... Certifications Pages ......................................................................................................... 1-2 00 01 10 ........... Table of Contents ............................................................................................................. 1-2 00 01 15 ........... List of Drawings ................................................................................................................... 1 00 11 13 ........... Notice to Bidders ................................................................................................................. 1 00 21 13 ........... Instructions to Bidders (AIA/A701-1997) ......................................................................... 1-8 00 22 14 ........... Supplementary Instructions to Bidders ............................................................................... 1 00 22 19 ........... Request for Clarification (RFC) Form ................................................................................. 1 00 25 13 ........... Pre-Bid Conference............................................................................................................. 1 00 42 13 ........... Proposal Form .................................................................................................................. 1-2 00 43 24 ........... Bid Bond (AIA/A310-2010) ............................................................................................... 1-2 00 43 25 ........... Request for Substitution (RFS) Form............................................................................... 1-2 00 43 43 ........... State Wage Rate Requirements and Determination Schedule ....................................... 1-7

................... Certificate from Matt Cowell, Director, Division of Labor Standards ................... Annual Wage Order No. 25, dated March 9, 2018, with Incremental Increase for

Osage County ................... Project Notification – Contractor Information, PW-2 (05-16) ................... Affidavit Compliance with the Prevailing Wage Law, PW-4 (07-14)

00 45 13 ........... Contractor’s Qualification Statement (AIA/A305-1986) ................................................... 1-4 00 52 13 ........... Master Agreement Owner-Contractor (A121-2014) ....................................................... 1-19 00 61 13.1 ........ Performance Bond (AIA/A312-2010) ............................................................................... 1-4 00 61 13.2 ........ Payment Bond (AIA/A312-2010) ...................................................................................... 1-4 00 72 00 ........... General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA/A201-2017) ......................... 1-40

DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 ........... Summary ............................................................................................................................. 1 01 20 00 ........... Price and Payment Procedures ....................................................................................... 1-3 01 30 00 ........... Administrative Requirements ........................................................................................... 1-4 01 32 16 ........... Construction Progress Schedule ..................................................................................... 1-2 01 40 00 ........... Quality Requirements....................................................................................................... 1-4 01 50 00 ........... Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................................................................... 1-3 01 60 00 ........... Product Requirements ..................................................................................................... 1-3 01 70 00 ........... Execution and Closeout Requirements............................................................................ 1-7 01 78 00 ........... Closeout Submittals ......................................................................................................... 1-4

DIVISION 2 – 21 – NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 05 23.12 ...... Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping………………………………………………………….....1-3 22 05 23.14 ...... Check Valves for Plumbing Piping ................................................................................... 1-3 22 05 29 ........... Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment…. ....................................... 1-8 22 05 53……….Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment………………………………………… 1-4

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 00 01 10 / 2 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution TABLE OF CONTENTS

22 11 16 ........... Domestic Water Piping .................................................................................................. 1-10

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, & AIR-CONDITIONING

23 05 17 ........... Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping .................................................................... 1-4 23 05 18 ........... Escutcheons for HVAC Piping ......................................................................................... 1-2 23 05 23.12 ...... Ball Valves for HVAC Piping ............................................................................................ 1-3 23 05 23.14 ...... Check Valves for HVAC Piping ........................................................................................ 1-3 23 05 29 ........... Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ................................................ 1-7 23 05 53 ........... Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment ................................................................ 1-4 23 09 23.11 ...... Control Valves .................................................................................................................. 1-7 23 21 13 ........... Hydronic Piping ................................................................................................................ 1-9 23 21 16 ........... Hydronic Piping Specialties ............................................................................................. 1-4 23 21 23 ........... Hydronic Pumps ............................................................................................................... 1-4 23 23 00 ........... Refrigerant Piping ............................................................................................................ 1-7 23 57 00 ........... Heat Exchangers for HVAC ............................................................................................. 1-4 23 65 14.16 ...... Closed-Circuit, Induced-Draft, Counterflow Cooling Towers ......................................... 1-13

DIVISION 24 – 25 – NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 19 ........... Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ................................................... 1-6 26 05 26 ........... Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ............................................................... 1-4 26 05 29 ........... Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ................................................................. 1-5 26 05 33 ........... Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems ................................................................... 1-8 26 05 53 ........... Identification for Electrical Systems ................................................................................. 1-5 26 24 16 ........... Panelboards ..................................................................................................................... 1-6 26 28 16 ........... Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ......................................................................... 1-4 26 29 13.03 ...... Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers .......................................................................... 1-6 26 15 19 ........... LED Interior Lighting ........................................................................................................ 1-5

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 01 15 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution LIST OF DRAWINGS

SECTION 00 01 15

LIST OF DRAWINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General

A. The Drawings referred to and accompanying this Project Manual and Specifications consist of the following sheets:

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING MEP1 MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL-PLUMBING COVER SHEET M100 MECHANICAL – ELECTRICAL PLAN MD100 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL DETAILS

END OF SECTION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 11 13 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution NOTICE TO BIDDERS

SECTION 00 11 13 NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed bids for a Stipulated Sum Contract will be received by The State Technical College of Missouri, 1 Technology Drive, Linn, MO, 65051, Attn. Mr. Brad Crede, until 3:00 pm on Tuesday, December 03, 2019, for the following work: The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn, Missouri General description of Work: Construction work generally consists of the installation of a new fluid cooler and associated piping required to connect into the existing ground-source water loop piping, and related components and additional items as described further in the specifications and drawings. The Bids will be opened publicly at the NiIlges Technology Center Bldg., First Floor Conference Room, 1 Technology Drive, Linn, MO, 65051. Contract Documents and other related contract document may be viewed & ordered online at https://www.adsplanroom.net/ or by contacting American Document Solutions, 1400 Forum Blvd, Suite 7A, Columbia, MO 65203, phone (573) 446-7768, email [email protected] for purchase. All Contract Documents must be obtained by the Bidder from ADS to be an Eligible Bidder. Your firm will be placed on the “Plan Holders’ List” only when a paper set of documents are ordered. The owner will not be responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including Addenda (if any) obtained from sources other than the issuing office. Contract Documents will be on file ADS as well as the following Plan Rooms:

ePlan Online Planroom, 503 E. Nifong Boulevard, Suite H, Box 346, Columbia, MO 65201 Builders Association of Missouri, 3632 West Truman Blvd., Jefferson City, MO 65109 Minority Contractors Association, 3200 Wayne Avenue, Suite 202, Kansas City, MO 64109

The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and to waive all informalities in Bids. No Bid may be withdrawn for a period of 60 days subsequent to the specified time for receipt of Bids. A MANDATORY pre-bid conference for BIDDING CONTRACTORS will be held on Tuesday, November 19, 2019, at 10:00am; at The ‘ITC’ (Information Technology Center) Building Professional Library, 1 Technology Drive, Linn, MO 65051. All other bidders/subcontractors/suppliers interested in this project are encouraged to attend as well. All Requests for Clarification (RFC) and Requests for Substitutions (RFS) need to be received four (4) working days prior to the bid. All request forms need to be complete and valid prior to forwarding them to the Engineer for review and consideration. All responses shall be included in an Addendum that will be made available to all planholders. RFC and RFS form are included in the bidding documents; an electronic version will be available on the ADS website. Questions pertaining to the Project should be directed to Mark Timberlake, Timberlake Engineering, 912 Old 63 S, Columbia, Missouri 65201; Telephone: (573) 875-4365. E-mail [email protected] OWNER: The State Technical College of Missouri

Linn, MO END OF SECTION

https://www.adsplanroom.net/



Document A701™- 2018 Instructions to Bidders

for the following Project: (Name, location, and detailed description)

IT Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn, MO

THE OWNER: (Name, legal status, address, and other information)

State Technical College of Missouri I Technology Drive Linn, MO 65051 Telephone Number: 573.897.5000

THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status, address, and other information)

Peckham & Wright Architects, Inc. d/b/a "PWArchitects, Inc." "PWA" 2120 Forum Boulevard, Suite 101 Columbia, Missouri 65203 Telephone Number: (573) 449-2683 Fax Number: (573) 442-6213

TABLE OF ARTICLES

DEFINITIONS

2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

4 BIDDING PROCEDURES

5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

6 POST-BID INFORMATION

7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL LAWS MAY IMPOSE REQUIREMENTS ON PUBLIC PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS. CONSULT LOCAL AUTHORITIES OR AN ATTORNEY TO VERIFY REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO THIS PROCUREMENT BEFORE COMPLETING THIS FORM.

It is intended that AlA Document G612""-2017, Owner's Instructions to the Architect, Parts A and B will be completed prior to using this document.

AlA Document A70FM- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute Of Archtlects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, 1 or any portion of It, may result in severe civH and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. user Notes: (3B9ADA56)

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the Proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, supplementary instructions to bidders, the bid form, and any other bidding forms. The Proposed Contract Documents consist of the unexecuted form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor and that Agreement's Exhibits, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, all Addenda, and all other documents enumerated in Article 8 ofthese Instructions.

§ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, or in other Proposed Contract Documents apply to the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect, which, by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections, modify or interpret the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do theW ork for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents, to which Work may be added or deleted by sums stated in Alternate Bids.

§ 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from, or that does not change, the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

§ 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment, or labor for a portion ofthe Work.

ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 By submitting a Bid, the Bidder represents that:

.1 the Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents;

.2 the Bidder understands how the Bidding Documents relate to other portions ofthe Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction;

.3 the Bid complies with the Bidding Documents;

.4 the Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and has correlated the Bidder's observations with the requirements of the Proposed Contract Documents;

.5 the Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception; and

.6 the Bidder has read and understands the provisions for liquidated damages, if any, set forth in the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 Distribution § 3.1.1 Bidders shall obtain complete Bidding Documents, as indicated below, from the issuing office designated in the advertisement or invitation to bid, for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall obtain Bidding Documents.)

§ 3.1.2 Any required deposit shall be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the paper Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost to replace missing or damaged paper

AlA Document A701 rM- 2018. Copyright© 1970. 1974, 1978. 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020. and is not tor resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA56)

2

documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the paper Bidding Documents, and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded.

§ 3.1.3 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the advertisement or invitation to bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders.

§ 3.1.4 Bidders shall use complete Bidding Documents in preparing Bids. Neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete Bidding Documents.

§ 3.1.5 The Bidding Documents will be available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by distribution of the Bidding Documents.

§ 3.2 Modification or Interpretation of Bidding Documents § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study the Bidding Documents, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall notifY the Architect of errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered and request clarification or interpretation pursuant to Section 3.2.2.

§ 3.2.2 Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be submitted by the Bidder in writing and shall be received by the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit requests for clarification and inte1pretation.)

§ 3.2.3 Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents shall be made by Addendum. Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them.

§ 3.3 Substitutions § 3.3.1 The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

§ 3.3.2 Substitution Process § 3.3.2.1 Written requests for substitutions shall be received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Requests shall be submitted in the same manner as that established for submitting clarifications and interpretations in Section 3.2.2.

§ 3.3.2.2 Bidders shall submit substitution requests on a Substitution Request Form if one is provided in the Bidding Documents.

§ 3.3.2.3 If a Substitution Request Form is not provided, requests shall include (1) the name of the material or equipment specified in the Bidding Documents; (2) the reason for the requested substitution; (3) a complete description of the proposed substitution including the name of the material or equipment proposed as the substitute, performance and test data, and relevant drawings; and (4) any other information necessary for an evaluation. The request shall include a statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment, or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts or the impact on any Project Certifications (such as LEED), that will result from incorporation of the proposed substitution.

§ 3.3.3 The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

§ 3.3.4 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval shall be set forth in an Addendum. Approvals made in any other manner shall not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them.

§ 3.3.5 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents.

AlA OocumentA701'"- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by u.s. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, 3 or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA56)

§ 3.4 Addenda § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to Bidders known by the issuing office to have received complete Bidding Documents. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Addenda will be transmitted.)

§ 3.4.2 Addenda will be available where Bidding Documents are on file.

§ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.4.4 Prior to submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall ascertain that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid.

ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 Preparation of Bids § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with or identified in the Bidding Documents.

§ 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed. Paper bid forms shall be executed in a non-erasable medium.

§ 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and numbers, unless noted othenvise on the bid form. ln case of discrepancy, the amount entered in words shall govern.

§ 4.1.4 Edits to entries made on paper bid forms must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.

§ 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter ''No Change" or as required by the bid form.

§ 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions ofthe Work have been requested. the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award ofless than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder. shall neither make additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner.

§ 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name and legal status of the Bidder. As part of the documentation submitted with the Bid, the Bidder shall provide evidence of its legal authority to perform the Work in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each copy of the Bid shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shaJI further name the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached, certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder.

§ 4.1.8 A Bidder shall incur all costs associated with the preparation of its Bid.

§ 4.2 Bid Security § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by the following bid security: (Insert the form and amount of bid security.)

§ 4.2.2 The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and shall, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. In the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2, the amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner.

AlA Document A701 TM- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protect&d by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document. or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and crimina! penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by A!A software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020. and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA56)

4

§ 4.2.3 lf a surety bond is required as bid security, it shall be written on AlA Document A31 0™, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. The attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of an acceptable power of attorney. The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 4.2.4 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished; (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn; or (c) all Bids have been rejected. However, if no Contract has been awarded or a Bidder has not been notified of the acceptance of its Bid, a Bidder may, beginning days after the opening ofBids, withdraw its Bid and request the return of its bid security.

§ 4.3 Submission of Bids § 4.3.1 A Bidder shall submit its Bid as indicated below: (Indicate how, such as by website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit their Bid.)

§ 4.3.2 Paper copies of the Bid, the bid security, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof.

§ 4.3.3 Bids shall be submitted by the date and time and at the place indicated in the invitation to bid. Bids submitted after the date and time for receipt of Bids, or at an incorrect place, will not be accepted.

§ 4.3.4 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.

§ 4.3.5 A Bid submitted by any method other than as provided in this Section 4.3 will not be accepted.

§ 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid § 4.4.1 Prior to the date and time designated for receipt of Bids, a Bidder may submit a new Bid to replace a Bid previously submitted, or withdraw its Bid entirely, by notice to the party designated to receive the Bids. Such notice shall be received and duly recorded by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. The receiving party shall verifY that replaced or withdrawn Bids are removed from the other submitted Bids and not considered. Notice of submission of a replacement Bid or withdrawal of a Bid shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.

§ 4.4.2 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids in the same format as that established in Section 4.3, provided they fully conform with these Instructions to Bidders. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted.

§ 4.4.3 After tke date and time designated for receipt of Bids, a Bidder who discovers that it made a clerical error in its Bid shall notify the Architect of such error within two days, or pursuant to a timeframe specified by the law of the jurisdiction where the Project is located, requesting withdrawal of its Bid. Upon providing evidence of such error to the reasonable satisfaction of the Architect, the Bid shall be withdrawn and not resubmitted. If a Bid is withdrawn pursuant to this Section 4.4.3, the bid security will be attended to as follows: (State the terms and conditions, such as Bid rank, for returning or retaining the bid security.)

ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 Opening of Bids If stipulated in an advertisement or invitation to bid. or when otherwise required by law, Bids properly identified and received within the specified time limits will be publicly opened and read aloud. A summary of the Bids may be made available to Bidders.

AlA Document A70PM- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA~' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, 5 or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA56)

§ 5.2 Rejection of Bids Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids.

§ 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder. provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's best interests.

§ 5.3.2 Unless otherwise prohibited by law. the Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted.

ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 Contractor's Qualification Statement Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request and within the timeframe specified by the Architect, a properly executed AlA Document A305™, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted for this Bid.

§ 6.2 Owner's Financial Capability A Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration may request in writing, fourteen days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, that the Owner furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. The Owner shall then furnish such reasonable evidence to the Bidder no later than seven days prior to the expiration ofthe time for withdrawal of Bids. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished within the allotted time, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 6.3 Submittals § 6.3.1 After notification of selection for the award of the Contract, the Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, submit in writing to the Owner through the Architect:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces;

.2 names ofthe principal products and systems proposed for the Work and the manufacturers and suppliers of each; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents.

§ 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, withdraw the Bid or submit an acceptable substitute person or entity. The Bidder may also submit any required adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to account for the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualifY the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited.

§ 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect.

ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 Bond Requirements § 7.1.1lfstipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder.

AlA DocumentA701 rM- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This MA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AtA'' Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/0612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA56)

6

§ 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum.

§ 7.1.3 The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 7.1.4 Unless otherwise indicated below, the Penal Sum of the Payment and Performance Bonds shall be the amount of the Contract Sum. (If Payment or Performance Bonds are to be in an amount other than 100% of the Contract Sum, indicate the dollar amount or percentage of the Contract Sum.)

§ 7.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to commence sooner in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1.

§ 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AlA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond.

§ 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract.

§ 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 8.1 Copies of the proposed Contract Documents have been made available to the Bidder and consist of the following documents:

.1 AlA Document AI 01 ™-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, unless otherwise stated below. (insert the complete AlA Document number, including year, and Document title.)

.2 AlA Document AIOI™-201 7, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, unless otherwise stated below. (insert the complete AlA Document number, including year, and Document title.)

.3 AlA Document A201 ™-20 17. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AlA Document number, including year, and Document title.)

.4 AlA Document E203™-20 13, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the £203-2013.)

.5 Drawings

AlA Document A701 r•- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAr' Document, 1 or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not tor resale. user Notes: (389ADA56)

.6

.7

.8

Number Title Date

Specifications

Section Title Date Pages

Addenda:

Number Date Pages

Other Exhibits: (Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifj,ing the exhibit where required.)

Title

AlA Document E204™-2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the cklte ofthe £204-2017.)

The Sustainability Plan:

Date Pages

Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

.9 Other documents listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Proposed Contract Documents.)

AlA Document A701'M- 2018. Copyright© 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved, WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA''' Document, 8 or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:26:24 ET on 11106/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 Which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA56)

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 22 14 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SECTION 00 22 14 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

GENERAL 1.01 SITE VISIT

A. All visits to the site shall be made with: Mr. Brad Crete, (573) 619-3844. 1.02 WAGE RATES AND LABOR STANDARDS

A. The Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, as determined by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations and is attached to this Project Manual.

1.03 BUILDING PERMIT REQUIREMENTS A. If required by the City the Owner will provide for the General Building Permit. The Contractor

shall be solely responsible for obtaining all other necessary building permits, licenses and other documents to perform this work. All work under this Agreement shall be done by Contractor in compliance with all applicable local, county, state and federal laws, codes, ordinances and regulations.

1.04 ADDENDA A. Change 3.4.3 to read “Addenda will be issued no later than forty-eight hours prior to the date

for receipt of Bids…”. B. All questions and substitution requests shall be in writing and on the forms included with the Bid

Documents. The deadline for these items is four (4) working days before the bid opening. 1.05 BID BOND

A. Add the following to 4.2.1 The Bid Bond shall be 5% of the value of construction. For purposes of bidding the

construction budget is $250,000. 1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Timing from Spec Section 00 72 01 Article 8: Time - 8.1.3.1 The Contractor is expected to achieve substantial completion and a working unit

and system within 8 weeks after notice to proceed, and final completion, including punchlist items, 10 weeks after notice to proceed. On site work can begin once notice to proceed has been issued by The Owner, which is anticipated to be no later than January 25, 2020.

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 22 19 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION (RFC) FORM

REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION (RFC) Project Title: The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Date:

Project Number: TE#15297 RFI #: (to be supplied by Engineer)

Architect / Engineer: Mark Timberlake, PE

Timberlake Engineering 912 Old Highway 63 South Columbia, MO 65201

Bidder/Contractor Requesting Information:

This is a clarification to resolve questions and/or conflicts in the plans and specifications. Any changes as a result of the response to the question below will be addressed under separate cover. Information/Clarification Requested:

Drawing Sheet or Specification Section Number:

Contractor’s Representative Signature:

Response to RFC:

Signature/Project Architect:

Date: CC: Encl: File:

The State Technical College of Missouri Dr. Donald Claycomb Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 25 13 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution PRE-BID CONFERENCE

SECTION 00 25 13 PRE-BID CONFERENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General

A. A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on Tuesday, November 19, 2019 at 10:00 am at State Technical College of Missouri at 1 Technology Drive, Linn, MO 65051. This is a MANDATORY Pre-Bid for all General Contractors. All other bidders interested in this project are encouraged to attend.

END OF SECTION

State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Proposal Form

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 42 13 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution PROPOSAL FORM

BID TIME: 3:00pm local time. BID DATE: December 03, 2019 FROM: ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ TO: State Technical College of Missouri FOR: Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Hereinafter called the "Work". 1. The Undersigned, having examined and being familiar with the local conditions affecting the Work and with the contract documents, including ” Instructions to Bidders”, ”Proposal Form”, “Special Conditions”, ”Contractor Agreement”, “Scope of Work” and “Drawings” Including Addenda Through , as issued by State Technical College of Missouri, hereby proposes to furnish and pay for all appropriate sales and use taxes, insurance, bonds, labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, and related items required for the performance and completion of the -work as follows: BASE BID (Overall Total Bid Amount): The Sum of dollars ($ )

BID ALTERNATE #1 (Non-metallic tower):

Add or (Deduct) Sum of dollars ($ )

2. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the owner, to reject any and all bids and it is agreed that the bids may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the specified time for receiving bids. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to award a contract in any manner deemed to Owner, at his sole discretion to be in his best interest. 3. Bidder proposes to complete all Work according to the Instructions to Bidders. 4. The Bidder is requested to define the number of calendar days to achieve final completion of this project if different than what is defined in 00 22 14 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders: _________________. 5. The bidder certifies that the following proposed subcontractors will be used in the performance of the Work (if none, so state):

Name of Subcontractor

1. Mechanical ____ ___ 2. Electrical ___________

6. The bidder hereby certifies that this proposal is genuine and is not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation, and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association or corporation. That the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham proposal; that the bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not sought by collusion or otherwise to obtain for themselves any advantage over any other bidder or over the owner, and that the bidder will not discriminate against any corporation, firm, company,

State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Proposal Form

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 42 13 / 2 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution PROPOSAL FORM

employee or applicant for employment for services because of sex, race, creed, color or national origin in connection with the performance of Work. Signed by: Title: _____________________________ Dated this day of , 20 . Organization type: Individual Partnership Corporation _____ _____________________________________ Name/title of officer Firm or partnership name ____________________________________________________________________________ Address for communication _______________________________ Telephone Fax If a Corporation: 1. Incorporated under the laws of the state of __________________________. 2. Licensed to do business in the State of Missouri? Yes No ________. (Each bidder must complete the proposal form by signing it in the proper signature lines above and by supplying the required information called for in connection with the signatures. The information is necessary for the proper preparation of a contract) Mail or deliver the proposal form to: Mr. Brad Crede

The State Technical College of Missouri 1 Technology Drive Linn, Missouri, 65051

I nit.

AlA DocumentA310"'- 2010

Bid Bond

CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address)

OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) State Technical College of Missouri l Technology Drive Linn, MO 65051

BOND AMOUNT:$

PROJECT:

SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place of business)

(Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) IT Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn, MO

The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either ( 1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days.

If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.


Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

AlA Document A310TM- 2010. Copyright© 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American lnstttute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA•·· Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wm be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:29:21 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is not tor resale. User Notes: (389ADA4A)

1

I nit.

Signed and sealed this day of

(Contractor as Principal) (Seal)

(Witness) (Title)

(Surety) (Seal)

(Witness) (Title)

AlA Document A310 1M- 2010. Copyright© 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American lnsmute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AfA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wi!l be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:29:21 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA4A)

2

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 43 25 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (RFS) FORM

REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (RFS) Substitutions prior to Bid Opening: (Minimum of 10 days prior to receipt of bids as per Article 3.3 - Instructions to Bidders) Project Title: The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center, Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Project Number: TE#15297

Architect / Engineer: Mark Timberlake, PE

Bidder/Contractor Requesting Substitution: Bidder / Contractor hereby requests acceptance of the following product or systems as a substitution in accord with the provisions described in Division One of the bidding documents:

Specified Product or System:

Specification Section Number:

Supporting Data:

Product data for proposed substitution is attached. (Include description of product, standards,

performance and test data.)

Sample Sample sent upon request QUALITY COMPARISON

Specified Product Substitution Requested

Name Brand:

Catalog Number:

Manufacturer:

Vendor: PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS

Project: Architect/Engineer:

Location: Date Installed:

SIGNIFICANT VARIATIONS:

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 43 25 / 2 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION (RFS) FORM

REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION:

DOES PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION AFFECT OTHER PARTS OF WORK:

Yes No

If Yes, Explain SUBSTITUTION REQUIRES DIMENSIONAL REVISION OR REDESIGN OF STRUCTURE OR A&E WORK:

Yes No Bidder’s/Contractors Statement of Conformance of Proposed Substitution with Bidding Documents: I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above; that It will provide the same warranty as specified product; that I/we have included complete implications of the substitution; that I/we will pay redesign and other costs caused by the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and that I/we will pay costs to modify other parts of the Work as may be needed, to make all parts of the Work complete and functioning resulting from the substitution.

Bidder/Contractor: Date:

Signature: REVIEW AND ACTION

Resubmit substitution request with the following additional information:

Substitution is accepted

Substitution is accepted with the flowing comments:

Substitution is not accepted

Architect / Engineer: Date:

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 00 43 43 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution STATE WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS AND DETERMINATION SCHEDULE

SECTION 00 43 43 STATE WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS AND DETERMINATION SCHEDULE

1.01 Not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages, as set out in the wage order attached to and

made part of the specification for work under the contract, must be paid to all workers performing work un the contract.

1.02 The contractor will forfeit a penalty to the contracting public body of $100 per day (or portion

of a day) for each worker that is paid less than the prevailing rate for any work done under the contract by the contractor or by any subcontractor.

1.03 The contractor and all subcontractors to the contract must require all on-site employees to

complete the ten-hour construction safety training program required under Section 292.675, RSMo, if they have not previously completed the program and have documentation of having done so.

1.04 The contractor will forfeit a penalty to the contracting public body of $2500 plus an additional

$100 for each employee employed by the contractor or subcontractor, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such employee is employed without the required training.

1.05 Forms:

A. Copies of the following forms are included as part of this Section: 1. Certificate from Matt Cowell, Division of Labor Standards, State of Missouri. 2. Annual Wage Order No. 26, dated March 9, 2019, Includes Incremental Increase for

Osage County 3. To be submitted before work begins: Project Notification-Contractor Information,

PW-2 (05-16). 4. To be submitted before final payment: Affidavit Compliance with the Prevailing Wage

Law. PW-4 (07-14).

END OF SECTION

Missouri Division of Labor Standards

WAGE AND HOUR SECTION

MICHAEL L. PARSON, Governor

Annual Wage Order No. 26 Section 076

OSAGE COUNTY

In accordance with Section 290.262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Box 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall certify that a copy has been furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 pursuant to 8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State of Missouri.

Original Signed by Taylor Burks, Director Division of Labor Standards

Filed With Secretary of State: ---------------:.M=a=r...:;c.-h....::S-.......=2-=-01.::,.;:;.9

Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 8, 2019

Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations

Building Construction Rates for OSAGE County

OCCUPATIONAL TITLE

Asbestos Worker Boilermaker Bricklayer Carpenter

Lather Linoleum La_y_er Millwriqht Pile Driver

Cement Mason Plasterer

Communications Technician Electrician (Inside Wireman) Electrician Outside Lineman

Lineman Operator Lineman -Tree Trimmer Ground man Groundman -Tree Trimmer

Elevator Constructor Glazier Ironworker Laborer General Laborer First Semi-Skilled Second Semi-Skilled

Mason Marble Mason Marble Finisher Terrazzo Worker Terrazzo Finisher Tile Setter Tile Finisher

Operating Engineer Group I Group II Group Ill Group 111-A Group IV Group V

Painter Plumber

Pipe Fitter Roofer Sheet Metal Worker Sprinkler Fitter Truck Driver

Truck Control Service Driver Group I Group II Group Ill Group IV

Basic **Date of Hourly Increase Rates

$20.72* $20.72* $20.72* $43.23

$20.72*

$20.72* $49.93 $20.72*

$20.72* $20.72* $20.72* $38.59

$20.72*

$56.33

$20.72* $20.72*

$20.72* $53.13 $20.72* $20.72*

*The Division of Labor Standards recei.ved less than 1,000 reportable hours as required by RSMo 290.257.4(b).

Public works contracting minimum wage is established for this occupational title using data provided by Missouri Economic Research and Information Center, in accordance with RSMo 290.257.2.

**Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 26

Section 076

3/19

Heavy Construction Rates for OSAGE County

Section 076

Basic OCCUPATIONAL TITLE **Date of Hourly

Increase Rates Carpenter $20.72*

Millwright Pile Driver

Electrician (Outside Lineman) $20.72* Lineman Operator Lineman- Tree Trimmer Ground man Groundman - Tree Trimmer

Laborer $20.72* General Laborer Skilled Laborer

Operating Enqineer $20.72* Group I Group II Group Ill Group IV

Truck Driver $20.72* Truck Control Service Driver Group I Group II Group Ill Group IV

Use Heavy Construction Rates on Highway and Heavy construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(3).

Use Building Construction Rates on Building construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(2).

If a worker is performing work on a heavy construction project within an occupational title that is not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use the rate for that occupational title as shown on the Building Construction Rate Sheet.

*The Division of Labor Standards received less than 1,000 reportable hours as required by RSMo 290.257.4(b). Public works contracting minimum wage is established for this occupational title using data provided by Missouri Economic Research and Information Center, in accordance with RSMo 290.257.2.

**Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 26 3/19

OVERTIME

OVERTIME and

HOLIDAYS

For all work performed on a Sunday or a holiday, not less than twice (2x) the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed or the public works contracting minimum wage, whichever is applicable, shall be paid to all workers employed by or on behalf of any public body engaged in the construction of public works, exclusive of maintenance work.

For all overtime work performed, not less than one and one-half (1 %) the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed or the public works contracting minimum wage, whichever is applicable, shall be paid to all workers employed by or on behalf of any public body engaged in the construction of public works, exclusive of maintenance work or contractual obligation. For purposes of this subdivision, "overtime work" shall include work that exceeds ten hours in one day and work in excess of forty hours in one calendar week; and

A thirty-minute lunch period on each calendar day shall be allowed for each worker on a public works project, provided that such time shall not be considered as time worked.

HOLIDAYS

January first; The last Monday in May; July fourth; The first Monday in September; November eleventh; The fourth Thursday in November; and December twenty-fifth;

If any holiday falls on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered a holiday.

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 26 3/19

$ DIVISION OF LABOR STANDARDS

MISSOURI DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

PREVAILING WAGE PROJECT NOTIFICATION-CONTRACTOR INFORMATION 0 New

The information below is requested pursuant to Sections 290.210 through 290.340. RSMo.

0 Update

I. Date ofNotification ,2. Annual Wage Order Number Included in Bid Specifications

3. Popular or Descriptive Name of Project

4. Estimated Project Cost of Completion (total construction contracts to be awarded) $

5. Exact Location of Project County .Q!y

6. Official Name of Public Body or Agency

7. N arne of Contact Person 18. Phone Number (include area code)

9. Address

l 0. Email Address Website

11. Contract A ward Date 112. Estimated Date of Project Completion 113. Will There Be Any Federal Funds Used in this Contract?

DYes 0No

14. Contractor Information Notification

General Contractor: Name

Address

City State ZIP

Phone Number Email Address

Type of Craftsmen Needed by Project

Scope ofWork

List all Subcontractors: I. Name

Address

City State ZIP



Scope of Work

2. Name

Address

City State ZIP



Scope of Work

3. Name

Address

City State ZIP



Scope of Work

PW-2 (05-16) AI

(Subcontractors continued)

4. Name

Address

City ------------------State-------- ZIP -------Phone Number


Scope of Work

5. Name

Address

Email Address--------------------



Scope of Work

6. Name

Address

Email Address--------------------

City ------------------State _______ _ ZIP _____ _

Phone Number


Scope of Work

7. Name

Address

Email Address--------------------

City _________________ Smre ______ _ ZIP --------Phone Number


Scope of Work

8. Name

Address

Email Address ________________ _:_ __ _



Scope of Work

9. Name

Address

Email Address--------------------

City ------------------State--------ZIP _____ _

Phone Number


Scope ofWork

Email Address--------------------

The state of Missouri requires workers on public works projects be paid the prevailing wage. Public bodies have duties as required under Section 290.210-290.340, RSMo.

Mail, Fax, or Email completed form to: DIVISION OF LABOR STANDARDS Attn: Prevailing Wage Section P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 Phone: 573-751-3403 Fax: 573-751-3721 Email: [email protected] Website: www.labor.mo.gov/DLS

SUBMIT

Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations is an equal opportunity employer/program. TDDITTY: 800-735-2966 Relay Missouri: 711

PW-2-2 (05-16) AI

MISSOURI DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

AFFIDAVIT & DIVISION OF LABOR STANDARDS COMPLIANCE WITH THE PREVAILING WAGE LAW

I,----------------' upon being duly sworn upon my oath state that: (l) I am the (Name)

_____________ of __________________ ; (2) all requirements of (Title) (Name of Company)

§§ 290.210 to 290.340, RSMo, pertaining to the payment of wages to workers employed on public works projects

have been fully satisfied with regard to this company's work on-------------------' (Name of Project)

(3) I have reviewed and am familiar with the prevailing wage rules in 8 CSR 30-3.010 to 8 CSR 30-3.060; (4) based

upon my knowledge of these rules, including the occupational titles set out in 8 CSR 30-3.060, I have completed full

and accurate records clearly indicating (a) the names, occupations, and crafts of every worker employed by this

company in connection with this project together with an accurate record of the number of hours worked by each

worker and the actual wages paid for each class or type of work performed, (b) the payroll deductions that have been

made for each worker, and (c) the amounts paid to provide fringe benefits, if any, for each worker; (5) the amounts

paid to provide fringe benefits, if any, were irrevocably made to a fund, plan, or program on behalf of the workers;

(6) these payroll records are kept and have been provided for inspection to the authorized representative of the

contracting public body and will be available, as often as may be necessary, to such body and the Missouri

Department of Labor and Industrial Relations; (7) such records shall not be destroyed or removed from the state for

one year following the completion of this company's work on this project; and (8) there has been no exception to the

full and complete compliance with the provisions and requirements of Annual Wage Order No. __ Section

issued by the Missouri Division of Labor Standards and applicable to this project located in

---------County, Missouri, and completed on the __ day of ______ ---,_, ___ ,

The matters stated herein are true to the best of my information, knowledge, and belief. I acknowledge that

the falsification of any information set out above may subject me to criminal prosecution pursuant to §§290.340,

570.090, 575.040, 575.050, or 575.060, RSMo.

Signature

Subscribed and sworn to me this __ day of ___________ _

My commission expires ______________ , ___ _

Notary Public

Receipt by Authorized Public Representative

Missouri Department of Labor and industrial Relations is an equal opportunity employer/program.

PW-4 (07-14) AI

AlA DocumentA305m -1986

Contractor's Qualification Statement

The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading.

SUBMITTED TO:

ADDRESS:

SUBMITTED BY:

NAME:

ADDRESS:

PRINCIPAL OFFICE:

Corporation Partnership Individual Joint Venture Other

NAME OF PROJECT: (if applicable) 2019xx IT Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution

TYPE OF WORK: (file separate form for each Classification of Work)

] General Construction ] HVAC J Electrical ] Plumbing ] Other: (SpecifY)

§ 1 ORGANIZATION § 1.1 How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor?

§ 1.2 How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name?

§ 1.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated?

§ 1.3 If your organization is a corporation, answer the following: § 1.3.1 Date of incorporation: § 1.3.2 State of incorporation: § 1.3.3 President's name: § 1.3.4 Vice-president's name(s)

§ 1.3.5 Secretary's name:

This document has important

legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

This form is approved and recommended by the American Institute of Architects {AlA) and The Associated General Contractors of America {AGC) for use in evaluating the qualifications of contractors. No endorsement of the submitting party or verification of the information is made by AlA or AGC.

AlA Document A305"' -1986. Copyright© 1964, 1969, 1979 and 1986 byThe American Institute Of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any 1 portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 14:56:04 ET on 10/14/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA61)

§ 1.3.6 Treasurer's name:

§ 1.4 If your organization is a partnership, answer the following: § 1.4.1 Date of organization: § 1.4.2 Type of partnership (if applicable): § 1.4.3 Name(s) of general partner(s)

§ 1.5 If your organization is individually owned, answer the following: § 1.5.1 Date of organization: § 1.5.2 Name of owner:

§ 1.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above. describe it and name the principals:

§ 2 LICENSING § 2.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable.

§ 2.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed.

§ 3 EXPERIENCE § 3.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces.

§ 3.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.) § 3.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it?

§ 3.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers?

§ 3.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years?

§ 3.3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.)

§ 3.4 On a separate sheet, list m~jor construction projects your organization has in progress. giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion date.

AlA Document A30STM -1986. Copyright© 1964, 1969, 1979 and 1986 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA® Document, or any 2 portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 14:56:04 ET on 10/14/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA61)

§ 3.4.1 State total worth of work in progress and under contract:

§ 3.5 On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost ofthe work performed with your own forces.

§ 3.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years:

§ 3.6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments ofthe key individuals of your organization.

§ 4 REFERENCES § 4.1 Trade References:

§ 4.2 Bank References:

§ 4.3 Surety: § 4.3.1 Name ofbonding company:

§ 4.3.2 Name and address of agent:

§ 5 FINANCING § 5.1 Financial Statement.

§ 5.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items:

Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid expenses);

Net Fixed Assets;

Other Assets;

Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes);

Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings).

AlA Document A305"'' -1986. Copyright© 1964, 1969, 1979 and 1986 byThe American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any 3 portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 14:56:04 ET on 10114/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9AOA61)

§ 5.1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and date thereof:

§ 5.1.3 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one?

§ 5.1.4Ifnot, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g., parent-subsidiary).

§ 5.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for construction?

§ 6 SIGNATURE § 6.1 Dated at this day of

Name of Organization:

By:

Title:

§ 6.2

M being duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading.

Subscribed and sworn before me this day of

Notary Public:

My Commission Expires:

AlA Document A30STM - 1986. Copyright© 1964, 1969, 1979 and 1986 byThe American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'0

Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 14:56:04 ET on 10/14/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA61)

4

I nit.

Document A121™- 2014 Standard Form of Master Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where Work is provided under multiple Work Orders

AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate day, month and year.)

BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address, and other information)

State Technical College of Missouri 1 Technology Drive Linn, MO 65051 Telephone Number: 573.897.5000

and the Contractor: (Name, legal status, address, and other information)

for the following: (Insert information related to types of projects, location, facilities, or other descriptive information as appropriate.)

The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to

its completion or modification.

This document does not contain a description of the Contractor's scope of Work or establish

payment terms or the dates of commencement of the Work or Substantial Completion. This document is intended to be used in conjunction with AlA Document A221 ™-2014, Work Order for use with Master Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

AlA Document A 121 TM - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of ArcMects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and lnternationa.l Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 1011512019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA3F)

1

I nit.

TABLE OF ARTICLES

MASTER AGREEMENT TERM AND PARTY REPRESENTATIVES

2 THEWORK

3 CONTRACT SUM

4 PAYMENT

5 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

6 GENERAL PROVISIONS

7 OWNER

8 CONTRACTOR

9 ARCHITECT

10 SUBCONTRACTORS

11 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

12 CHANGES IN THE WORK

13 TIME

14 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

15 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

16 INSURANCE AND BONDS

17 CORRECTION OF WORK

18 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

19 TERMINATION

20 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

21 SCOPE OF THIS MASTER AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 1 MASTER AGREEMENT TERM AND PARTY REPRESENT~TIVES § 1.1 This Master Agreement shall be effective for one year after the date first written above ("Date of this Master Agreement").

§ 1.2 This Master Agreement shall apply to all Work Orders agreed to within the term ofthis Master Agreement until completion ofthe Work Order. ln the event of a conflict between the terms and conditions of this Master Agreement and a Work Order, the terms of the Work Order shall take precedence for the Work provided pursuant to the Work Order.

§ 1.3 This Master Agreement will renew on an annual basis, on the day and month of the Date ofthis Master Agreement, unless either party provides notice of their intent not to renew this Master Agreement. Notice must be provided at least 60 days prior to the renewal date. In the event either party elects not to renew this Master

AlA Document A 121 '" - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A!A'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in 2 severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA3F)

I nit.

Agreement, the terms of this Master Agreement shall remain applicable until all Work Orders executed under this Master Agreement are completed or terminated.

§ 1.4 The Owner identifies the following representative authorized to act on the Owner's behalf with respect to this Master Agreement:

§ 1.4.1 In each Work Order, the Owner will identifY a representative authorized to act on the Owner's behalf with respect to the Work Order.

§ 1.5 The Contractor identifies the following representative authorized to act on the Contractor's behalf with respect to this Master Agreement:

§ 1.5.1 In each Work Order, the Contractor will identify a representative authorized to act on behalf of the Contractor with respect to the Work Order.

ARTICLE 2 THE WORK § 2.1 The Contractor shall execute the Work set forth in each agreed upon Work Order, consisting of AIA Document A221-20 14, Work Order, or such other document as the Owner and Contractor may mutually agree upon. Each Work Order shall state the name, location and detailed description of the Project; identify the Architect; state the Contract Time; state the Contract Sum; describe the Work; and enumerate the Contract Documents.

§ 2.2 The Contractor may refuse to agree to any Work Order issued by the Owner.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT SUM § 3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds in accordance with each individual Contract.

§ 3.2 Where the Contract Sum is based on the Cost of the Work under Section 3.3 or 3.4 of the Work Order, the Cost of the Work is defined in Exhibit A, Determination of the Cost of the Work.

ARTICLE 4 PAYMENT § 4.1 Progress Payments § 4.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment for individual Contracts submitted to the Architect by the Contractor, and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows:

§ 4.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an

AlA Document A121 TM- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA•' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10115/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

3

I nit.

Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.)

§ 4.1.4 Retainage, if any, shall be withheld as follows:

§ 4.1.5 Payments due and unpaid under a Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)

%

§ 4.2 Final Payment § 4.2.1 Final payment for individual Contracts, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Work except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 17.2, and to satiszy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment;

.2 the Contractor has submitted a final accounting for the Cost ofthe Work, where payment is on the basis ofthe Cost ofthe Work with or without a guaranteed maximum price; and

.3 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.

§ 4.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:

ARTICLE 5 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 5.1 Binding Dispute Resolution For any claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Section 20.3, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, claims will be resolved in a court of competent jurisdiction.)

Arbitration pursuant to Section 20.4 ofthis Master Agreement

Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction

Other: (Specify)

ARTICLE 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 6.1 The Work The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents enumerated in a Work Order, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations under the Work Order and related Contract. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project identified in a particular Work Order.

§ 6.2 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in each Work Order and consist of this Master Agreement; the Work Order executed by the Owner and Contractor (including, if applicable, Supplementary and other Conditions applicable to the Work Order); all Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda issued in connection with the Work Order; other

AlA Document A 121 tM - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA'o Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

4

In it.

documents listed in the Work Order; and Modifications issued after execution of the Work Order. A Modification is ( 1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or ( 4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.

§ 6.3 The Contract The Contract Documents for each Work Order form a separate Contract for construction of the Work ("The Contract''). The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto for construction of the Work and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. A Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor.

§ 6.4 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, digital models, and other similar materials.

§ 6.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service § 6.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with a Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' reserved rights.

§ 6.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. AU copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to a Project outside the scope of a Contract without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants.

§ 6.6 Transmission of Data in Digital Form Ifthe parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmission. Unless otherwise agreed, the Parties will use AlA Document E203™-2013 to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data and building information modeling.

ARTICLE 7 OWNER § 7.1 The Owner is not required to issue any Work Orders under this Master Agreement.

§ 7.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 7.2.1 The Owner shall furnish all necessary surveys and a legal description of sites referenced in a Work Order.

§ 7.2.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 7.2.3 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 8.6.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for other necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

AlA Document A 121""- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American lnstttute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wm be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10115/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes; (389ADA3F)

5

I nit.

§ 7.3 Owner's Right to Stop the Work lfthe Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements ofthe Contract Documents, or repeatedly fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order is eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity.

§ 7.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, may correct such deficiencies and, subject to Section 14.2.5, may deduct the reasonable cost thereof, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's services made necessary thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor.

ARTICLE 8 CONTRACTOR § 8.1 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 8.1.1 Execution of a Work Order by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the relevant site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 8.1.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion ofthe Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 7 .2.1, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion ofthe Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors. inconsistencies, or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.1.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 8.2 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 8.2.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions ofthe Work under a Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 8.3 Labor and Materials § 8.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 8.3.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.

AlA Document A 121 "' - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA3F)

6

I nit.

§ 8.3.3 The Contractor may make a substitution only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Modification.

§ 8.4 Warranty The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under a Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements ofthe Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear under normal usage.

§ 8.5 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded for an individual Contract, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 8.6 Permits, Fees, Notices, and Compliance with Laws § 8.6.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as other permits, fees, licenses and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of a Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 8.6.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance ofthe Work. Ifthe Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 8. 7 Allowances The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for each Work Order all allowances stated in the Contract Documents for that Work Order. The Owner shall select materials and equipment under allowances with reasonable promptness. Allowance amounts shall include the costs to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts. Allowance amounts shall not include the Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

§ 8.8 Contractor's Construction Schedules § 8.8.1 The Contractor, promptly after executing a Work Order, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work described in that Work Order. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions ofthe Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution ofthe Work,

§ 8.8.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedule submitted to the Owner and Architect.

§ 8,9 Submittals § 8.9.1 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in coordination with the Contractor's construction schedule and in such sequence as to allow the Architect reasonable time for review. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them; (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so; and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements ofthe Work and ofthe Contract Documents. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.

§ 8.9,2 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.

AlA Document A 121 TM - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA•· Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at11 :30:10 ET on 1011512019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

7

I nit.

§ 8.10 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site(s) to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site(s) with materials or equipment.

§ 8.11 Cutting and Patching The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.

§ 8.12 Cleaning Up The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under a Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from and about the Project.

§ 8.13 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or Joss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent the Contractor shall be responsible for such Joss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

§ 8.14 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 8.151ndemnification § 8.15.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnifY and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any ofthem from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 8.15.1.

§ 8.15.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 8.15 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 8.15.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 9 ARCHITECT § 9.1 The Owner shall retain an Architect to perfonn the services enumerated in this Article 9 and as described elsewhere in this Master Agreement. lf an Architect is not required by law, or otherwise not engaged on the Project, the Owner shall perform such services.

§ 9.2 The Architect listed on each Work Order will provide administration ofthe Contract and will be an Owner's representative during construction, until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment for the Contract. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.

AlA Document A 121"' - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA0' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10115/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is notfor resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

8

I nit.

§ 9.3 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general, if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.4 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in theW ork. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 9.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certifY the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 9.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents and to require inspection or testing of the Work.

§ 9.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect will make initial decisions on all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor but will not be liable for results of any interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 9.9 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

ARTICLE 10 SUBCONTRACTORS § 10.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity that has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at a Project site.

§ 10.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after execution of a Work Order, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of the Subcontractors or suppliers for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable written objection within ten days after receipt of the Contractor's list of Subcontractors and suppliers. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 10.3 Contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors shall (1) require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of

AlA Document A121,..- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American lnsmute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe ctvH and crtmtnal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/1512019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

9

I nit.

the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect, and (2) allow the Subcontractor the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner.

ARTICLE 11 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 11.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to a Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of a Project or other construction or operations on the site under conditions of the contract identical or substantially similar to these, including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make a claim as provided in Article 20.

§ 11.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and the Owner's separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's activities with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 11.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor.

ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 12.1 By appropriate Modification, changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of a Work Order. The Owner, without invalidating this Master Agreement or a Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. Such changes in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, or by written Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner and Architect.

§ 12.2 Adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement of the parties or, in the case of a Construction Change Directive signed only by the Owner and Architect, by the Contractor's cost oflabor, material, equipment, and reasonable overhead and profit, unless the parties agree on another method for determining the cost or credit. Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed pursuant to the Construction Change Directive. The Architect will make an interim determination of the amount of payment due for purposes of certifYing the Contractor's monthly Application for Payment. When the Owner and Contractor agree on adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from a Construction Change Directive, the Architect will prepare a Change Order.

§ 12.3 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.

§ 12.4 If concealed or unknown physical conditions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted as mutually agreed between the Owner and Contractor; provided that the Contractor provides notice to the Owner and Architect promptly and before conditions are disturbed.

ARTICLE 13 TIME § 13.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Work Order, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 13.2 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 13.3 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.

AlA Document A 121 TM - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and lnterrlationa! Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA<' Document, or any portion of it, may result in 1 O severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10115/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is nottor resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

In it.

§ 13.4 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 14.4.3.

§ 13.5 Ifthe Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justifY delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine, subject to the provisions of Article 20.

ARTICLE 14 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 14.1 Applications for Payment § 14.1.1 Applications for Payment will be submitted individually for each Contract.

§ 14.1.2 Where a Contract is based on a Stipulated Sum or the Cost of the Work plus a Contractor's fee with or without a Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used in reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

§ 14.1.3 With each Application for Payment based upon the Cost of the Work, or the Cost of the Work plus a Contractor's fee with or without a Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit payrolls, petty cash accounts, receipted invoices or invoices with check vouchers attached, and any other evidence required by the Owner to demonstrate that cash disbursements already made by the Contractor on account of the Cost ofthe Work equal or exceed (1) progress payments already received by the Contractor, less (2) that portion of those payments attributable to the Contractor's Fee; plus (3) payrolls for the period covered by the present Application for Payment.

§ 14.1.4 Payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment stored, and protected from damage, off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.

§ 14.1.5 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall. to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or other encumbrances adverse to the Owner's interests.

§ 14.2 Certificates for Payment § 14.2.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notifY the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 14.2.3.

§ 14.2.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality ofthe Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or ( 4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 14.2.3 Subject to Section 14.2.5, the Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner

AlA Document A 121 TM - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIN' Document, or any portion of it. may result in 11 severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020. and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

In it.

required by Section 14.2.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notifY the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 14.2.1. Ifthe Contractor and the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullifY the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 8.2.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.4 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 14.2.5 The Architect may not withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, and the Owner shall not withhold payment to the Contractor to impose a penalty or liquidated damages on the Contractor, unless the Contractor agrees or has been found liable for the amounts in a binding dispute resolution proceeding. In any event, the Architect may not withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, and the Owner shall not withhold payments to the Contractor, pertaining to one Contract to offset amounts in dispute under a separate Contract.

§ 14.3 Progress Payments § 14.3.1 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 14.3.2 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 14.3.3 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance ofWork not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 14.4 Substantial Completion § 14.4.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 14.4.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 14.4.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. When the Architect determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall

AlA Document A121 '"- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in 12 severe civil and criminal penalties, and wm be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9AOA3F)

I nit.

commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 14.4.4 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment ofretainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.5 Final Completion and Final Payment § 14.5.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions stated in Section 1 4.5.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 14.5.2 Final payment shall not become due until the Contractor has delivered to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out ofthe Contract or receipts in full covering all labor, materials and equipment for which a lien could be filed, or a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnifY the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.

§ 14.5.3 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

§ 14.5.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 15 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 15.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of a Contract. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors; and

,3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons and property and their protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 15.1.2 and 15.1.3, except for damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.15.

AlA Document A121 TM- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorlzed reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in 13 severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 1011512019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/2412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

I nit.

§ 15.2 Hazardous Materials § 15.2.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents r.egarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents, and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement ofthe Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay and start-up.

§ 15.2.2 To the fullest extent permitted by Jaw, the Owner shall indemnifY and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages_, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area, if in fact, the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 15.2.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 15.2.31f, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

ARTICLE 16 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 16.1 The Contractor shall purchase from, and maintain in, a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Pr~ject is located, insurance for protection from (1) claims under workers' compensation acts and other employee benefit acts which are applicable; (2) claims for damages because of bodily injury, including death; and (3) claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, to property which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations and completed operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them. This insurance shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in Section 16.1.2, or as specified in a Work Order or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, or required by law, whichever coverage is greater, and shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.15. Certificates of Insurance, acceptable to the Owner, evidencing required coverages, shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement ofthe Work. The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect's Consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor's operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor's completed operations.

§ 16.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of a Contract and payment of obligations thereunder as specified in Section 16.1.2, or as specified in a Work Order or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under a Contract, the Contractor shall . promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or.shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

§ 16.1.2 The Contractor shaiJ purchase and maintain insurance of the types and with the limits set forth below, and provide bonds as set forth below, for each Contract created pursuant to this Master Agreement. (State bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required)

Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount(% of Contract Sum)

§ 16.1.3 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Owner of the cancellation or expiration of any of the insurance required by this Section 16.1. The Contractor shall provide such written notice within five (5) business

AlA Document A12PM- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of ArchiTects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is prot~cted by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorlzed reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion olit. may result in severe clvll and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 1011512019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is notfor resale. User Notes: (389ADA3F)

14

I nit.

days of the date the Contractor is first aware of the cancellation or expiration or is first aware that the cancellation or expiration is threatened or otherwise may occur, whichever comes first.

§ 16.2 Owner's Liability Insurance The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance.

§ 16.3 Property Insurance § 16.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form, including builder's risk, in the amount ofthe initial Contract Sum, plus the value of subsequent modifications and cost of materials supplied and installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 14.5 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 16.3.1 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests ofthe Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project.

§ 16.3.2 The Owner shall file a copy of each policy with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. The Owner shall provide written notification to the Contractor of the cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by Section 16.2 and 16.3. The Owner Shall provide such written notice within five (5) business days of the date the Owner is first aware ofthe cancellation or expiration, or is first aware that the cancellation or expiration is threatened or otherwise may occur, whichever comes first.

§ 16.3.3 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (I) each other and any of their subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article II, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to Section 16.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article I1, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any ofthem, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged.

§ 16.3.4 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

ARTICLE 17 CORRECTION OF WORK § 17.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense, unless compensable under Section A.2. 7.3 in Exhibit A, Determination ofthe Cost ofthe Work.

§ 17.2 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.4, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 14.4.3, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the

AlA Document A 121m - 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American lnstrtute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA<' Document, or any portion of it, may result in 15 severe civit and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA3F)

I nit.

Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notifY the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.

§ 17.3 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 7.4.

§ 17.4 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion ofthe Work.

§ 17.5 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Article 17.

ARTICLE 18 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 18.1 Assignment of Contract Neither party to a Contract shall assign the Contract without written consent of the other, except that the Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.

§ 18.2 Governing Law A Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project described in the Contract is located, except that if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 20.4.

§ 18.3 Tests and Inspections Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes. rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating the costs to the Contractor.

§ 18.4 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to a Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in this Master Agreement within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 18.4.

ARTICLE 19 TERMINATION § 19.1 Termination of a Contract A Contract may be terminated in accordance with this Article 19. Termination of a Contract under this Article 19 shall not be deemed a termination of any other Contract created pursuant to this Master Agreement.

§ 19.1.1 Termination by the Contractor If the Architect fails to certifY payment as provided in Section 14.2.1 for a period of 30 days through no fault of the Contractor, or if the Owner fails to make payment as provided in Section 4.1.3 for a period of 30 days, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages.

AlA DocumentA121 rM- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American lnstttute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''· Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in 16 severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA3F)

I nit.

§ 19.1.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 19.1.2.1 The Owner may terminate a Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 19.1.2.2 When any of the above reasons exists, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have and after giving the Contractor seven days' written notice, terminate a Contract and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 19.1.2.3 When the Owner terminates a Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 19 .1.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 19.1.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§19.1.3 Termination by the Owner for Convenience The Owner may, at any time, terminate a Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. The Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed.

ARTICLE 20 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 20.1 Claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to a Contract executed pursuant to this Master Agreement, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Section 15.2, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. Such matters, except those waived as provided for in Section 20.8 and Sections 14.5.3 and 14.5.4, shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the matter to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 20.2 If a claim, dispute or other matter in question relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such matter may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 20.3 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their disputes by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with their Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of this Master Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to this Master Agreement, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the binding dispute resolution but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 20.4 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in this Master Agreement, any claim, subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association, in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of this Master Agreement. Demand for arbitration shall

AlA Document A121 TM- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in 17 severe civil and criminal penarties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10!15!2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01!24!2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA3F)

I nit.

be made in writing, delivered to the other party to this Master Agreement, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 20.5 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Master Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that ( 1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation; (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions oflaw or fact; and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 20.6 Any party to an arbitration may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described in the written Consent.

§ 20.7 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to this Master Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 20.8 Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to any Contracts formed pursuant to this Master Agreement. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 19. Nothing contained in this Section 20.8 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 21 SCOPE OF THIS MASTER AGREEMENT § 21.1 This Master Agreement represents the entire and integrated Master Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements. either written or oral. This Master Agreement may be amended only by written instrument signed by both Owner and Contractor.

§ 21.2 This Master Agreement is comprised of the following documents listed below: .1 Exhibit A, Determination ofthe Cost of the Work. if applicable . . 2 AlA Document £203™-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed,

or the following:

.3 Other documents: (List other documents incorporated into this Master Agreement.)

This Master Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)

AlA Document A121 >"- 2014. Copyright© 2014 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA''' Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of lt. may result in 18 severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 11:30:10 ET on 10/15/2019 under Order No, 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3B9AOA3F)

I nit.

AlA DocumentA312'"- 2010

Performance Bond

CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place of

business)

OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) State Technical College of Missouri I Technology Drive Linn, MO 65051

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount:$ Description: (Name and location) IT Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn,MO

BOND Date: (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date)

Amount:$ Modifications to this Bond:

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: Signature:

Name and Title:

(Corporate Seal)

None

SURETY Company: Signature:

Name and Title:

See Section 16

(Corporate Seal).

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond.)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY- Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:

(Architect, Engineer or other party:)



Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered

plural where applicable.

AlA Document A312r•- 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"· Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw. This document was produced by A!A software at 15:31:54 ET on 11/0612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA4B)

1

I nit.

§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

§ 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3.

§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after

.1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor's performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Ovmer's notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten (I 0) business days of the Surety's receipt of the Owner's notice. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

.2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

.3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

§ 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety's obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

§ 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions:

§ 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

§ 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

§ 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or

§ 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or

.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

§ 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

AlA Document A312TM- 2010 Pertormance Bond. The American InstiTute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the Jaw. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:31:54 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA4B)

2

I nit.

§ 7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for

.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

.2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and

.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

§ 8lf the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5.4, the Surety's liability is limited to the amount ofthis Bond.

§ 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

§ 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part ofthe work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

§ 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

§ 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

§ 14 Definitions § 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

§ 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

§ 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure ofthe Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

§ 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

§ 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

AlA Document A312'M- 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:31:54 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA48)

3

I nit.

§ 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

§ 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature:

Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address:

AlA Document A312'M- 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distributitm of this AlA•·· Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:31:54 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA48)

4

I nit.

AlA Document A312"' - 201 o Payment Bond

CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place of

business)

OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) State Technical College of Missouri I Technology Drive Linn, MO 65051

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount:$ Description: (Name and location) IT Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn,MO

BOND Date: (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date)

Amount:$ Modifications to this Bond:

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: Signature:

Name and Title:

(Corporate Seal)

None

SURETY Company: Signature:

Name and Title:

See Section 18

(Corporate Seal)

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Payment Bond)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY- Name, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:

(Architect, Engineer or other party:)



Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

AlA Document A312TM- 2010 Payment Bond. The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"· Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:32:32 ET on 11/0612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA48)

1

I nit.

§ 1 The Contractor and Surety,jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

§ 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.

§ 3 Ifthere is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner's property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

§ 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit.

§ 5 The Surety's obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:

§ 5.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the

amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed. within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13 ).

§ 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13).

§ 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant's obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1.

§ 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions:

§ 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

§ 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

§ 7.3 The Surety's failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnifY the Claimant for the reasonable attorney's fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.

§ 8 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney's fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

§ 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfY claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfY obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

AlA Document A312"'- 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA•' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at15:32:32 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892265182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA48)

2

I nit.

§ 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Consttuction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on behalf of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

§ 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date ( 1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of ( 1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

§ 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

§ 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conf1icting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

§ 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

§ 16 Definitions § 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

.1 the name ofthe Claimant;

.2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

.3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

.4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished;

.5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

.6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

.7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

.8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

§ 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic's lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished.

§ 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

AlA Document A312m- 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:32:32 ET on 11106/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA48)

3

I nit.

§ 16.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

§ 16.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

§ 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature:

Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address:

AlA Document A312'M- 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA•' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:32:32 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA48)

4

I nit.

AlA Document A201m- 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)

IT Center Ground Loop Water Temp Solution Linn,MO

THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address)

State Technical College of Missouri 1 Technology Drive Linn, MO 65051

THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address)

Peckham & Wright Architects. Inc. d/b/a "PWArchitects, Inc." "PWA" 2120 Forum Boulevard, Suite 101 Columbia, Missouri 65203

TABLE OF ARTICLES

GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT


For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AlA Document A503 TM, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970. 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. · UserNotes: (389ADA52)

1

I nit.

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

AlA Document A201 TM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wl!l be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not tor resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

2

I nit.

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1' 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9. 7, 9.10 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1' 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1 Arbitration 8.3.1' 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.5, 3.12. 7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7 .1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.1 0, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.5, 3. 1.3, 3.5, 3.1 0.2, 4.2.7

Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect's Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2 Architect's Inspections 3. 7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.1 0.1, 13.4 Architect's Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2. 7, 13.4.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect's Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3 Architect's Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect's Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.1 0.1' 13.4 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys' Fees 3.18.1' 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 1 0.3.3 A ward of Separate Contracts 6.1.1' 6.1.2 A ward of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions ofthe Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 Bonds, Lien 7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9. I 0.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Building Information Models Use and Reliance 1.8 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate ofSubSLantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment

AlA Document A201 m- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and wHI be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

3

I nit.

4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 Certificates oflnspection, Testing or Approval 13.4.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2 Change Orders 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Change Orders. Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1' 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 Claims, Notice of 1.6.2, 15.1.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2,15.1.6 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, I 0.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.4. I Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1. 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1' 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications 3.9. I, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Compliance with Laws 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3

Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3. 14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.1 0.2. 9.1 0.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's 3.10, 3.11. 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 2.2.2. 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Contract Sum. Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3. 7.4, 3.7.5, 3.1 0.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.1 0, 7.4, 8.1.1' 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1. 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules 3.10, 3.12.L 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contractor's Employees

AlA Document A201 ™- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstrtute Of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of it.- may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (369ADA52)

4

I nit.

2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, I 1.3, 14.1, I4.2.1.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, Il.3, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.I8.I, 3.I8.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.1 0.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.I6, 3.I8, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7. 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, I0.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, I3.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Contractor's Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.I2.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.I8, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, I0.2.8 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 2.2.2, 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Contractor's Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.I2, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.I, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Contractor's Superintendent 3.9, I0.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.IO, 4.2.2. 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, IO, 12, I4, I5.I.4 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.I2.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.3.6, 3. I I Copyrights 1.5. 3.17 Correction of Work 2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, I2.1.2, 12.2, I2.3, I5.1.3.I, I5.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.4 Costs 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.I5.2. 5.4.2, 6.I.I, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, I0.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, I3.4, I4 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, I 0.2.1.2. I 0.2.5, I 0.4, 12.2.4

Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.I, 10.2.1.2, I0.2.5, 10.4, I2.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.I, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 1 I .3.2, Il.3.I4.2.4, I5.1.7 Damages for Delay 6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1 .6, 9. 7, 1 0.3.2, I4.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3. 7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2. 7, 4.2.11, 4.2.I 2, 4.2.I3, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, I4.2.2, 14.2.4, I5.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1' 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.I Definitions I.I, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.I2.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.I, 9.8.1, 15.1.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.I, 7.3.I, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.I, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Digital Data Use and Transmission 1.7 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.I' 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date oflnsurance 8.2.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 Employees, Contractor's 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1' 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, I0.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, or Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2. 7, 5.2.I, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.I 0.2, 10.2.1' 1 0.2.4, I4.2.l.l' 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.I, 3.10.1, 3.I2, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.I, 10.2, I0.3, I2.I, I2.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, I5.1.4 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.I, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.I, 9.7, I0.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, I5.1.6, 15.2.5

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911. 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA0 Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. user Notes: (3B9ADA52)

5

In it.

Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10. 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2.2.1, 13.2.2. 14.1.1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.2.4. 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.1 0.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3. 7.1' 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11 Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 Insurance. Stored Materials 9.3.2

INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of 11.5 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13 Interest 13.5 Interpretation 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3. 3.2.4, 3.6, 3. 7, 3.12.1 0, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Limitations ofLiability 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1,4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2. 7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, I 0.2.1.2, I 0.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic's Lien 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.1 0.2, 9.1 0.4, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2. 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, !5.4.1, 15.4.1.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1. 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13

AlA Document A201 '"- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/0612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

6

I nit.

Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 1 0.3.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Non conforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1. 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2 Notice 1.6, 1.6.1' 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, ll.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, I 5.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration oflnsurance 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Notice of Claims 1.6.2, 2. 1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, I 0.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Observations, Contractor's 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, ll.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3. I 2.1 0, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner's Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1. 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 1 1.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner's Insurance 11.2 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.1 0.2, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2.5, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to

Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.4 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2, 14.4 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1. 7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11' 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3,9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Permi~s, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11; 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Project, Definition of 1.1.4

AlA Document A201 TM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

7

I nit.

Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance I 0.2.5, 11.2 Proposal Requirements 1.1.1 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 2.3.2. 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2. 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection ofWork 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.3.1, 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retain age 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2. 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2. 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6. 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2. 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11' 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules. Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6. 8.3. L 12.1.2

Separate Contractors, Definition of 6.1.1 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Site Visits, Architect's 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7. 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3 Substances, Hazardous 10.3 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.1 0.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 2.3.3 Substitutions ofMaterials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4

AlA Document A201 "'- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution ol this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal pEmalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ETon 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

8

I nit.

Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.1 0, 4.2.2, 4.2. 7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1' 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.1 0.5, 1 4.2.1 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.8.5, 9.1 0.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 1.1. 7, 2.3.4 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1' 7.3.4.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1. 7 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 2.3.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment 14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Time Limits

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.1 0, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3. I 5.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1' 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 9.1.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.3.2,15.1.7 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3. 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1. 7 Waiver of Liens 9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 Weather Delays 8.3, 15.1.6.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.1 0.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1

AlA Document A201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This A fA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution ot this AlA''' Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wHI be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

9

I nit.

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General. Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (I) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders. sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor's bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

§ 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind ( 1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.

§ 1.1.3 The Work The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design. location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys. models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.81nitial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.

AlA Document A201 1M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and crimina! penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

10

In it.

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed. to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties' intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are ( 1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifYing words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections I. 7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect's consultants.

§ 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notifY or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section I 5.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use oflnstruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AlA Document E203™-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set

AlA Document A201 ™- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA''' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and crimina! penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

11

I nit.

forth in AlA Document E203™-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AlA Document G202TrvL2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein.

§ 2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of theW ork and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately.

§ 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor. the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract only if ( 1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor's request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as "confidential," the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose "confidential" information, after seven (7) days' notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information.

§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3. 7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

AlA Document A20fTM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.EL Copyright Law and lntemational Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

12

In it.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

§ 2.3.3 Jfthe employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site ofthe Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullifY a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed. if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1 .3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform theW ork in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915,1918, 1925, 1937,1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The American lnsmute of Architects. All rights reserved. WAI'<NING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution ol this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wi!l be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

13

I nit.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable Jaws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information iri such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe. the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor's proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment. tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this MA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe Civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11106/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

14

I nit.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7 .4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality ofthe Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4.

§ 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution ofthe Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than I 4 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notifY the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work. the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately

AlA Document A201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wil! be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

15

I nit.

suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Ovmer but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and

all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or Jess than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect ( 1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract shall notifY the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notifY the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect ( 1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.1 0.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion ofthe Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression ofthe Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval. The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

AlA Document A201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

16

I nit.

§ 3.1 0.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available. at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record ofthe Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (I) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data. Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect's approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

AlA DocumentA20PM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/2412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

17

I nit.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1Ifprofessional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shaH cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfY. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.1 0, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 lfthe Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable Jaws, statutes. ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting. fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or othenvise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

AlA DocumentA201'M -2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976. 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA''' Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wi!l be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

18

I nit.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

§ 3.181ndemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnifY and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, Joss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, Joss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of theW ork completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed. and promptly report to the Owner (I) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not

AlA Document A201""- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

19

I nit.

have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through th·e Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations ofthe Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certifY the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections I 3.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8: receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.1 0; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

AlA Document A201"~- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'9 Document, or any portion of it, may result in sevnre civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

20

I nit.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. lf appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor'' is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subsubcontractor.

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notifY the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. Ifthe proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will

AlA Document A201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966,1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thiS AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

21

In it.

similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Subsubcontractors.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notii)'ing the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any. obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term "Separate Contractor(s)" shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination ofthe activities of the Owner's own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities. and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 lfpart of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notii)' the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor's Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the

AlA Document A201 '"- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA., Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA''' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15;33;37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

22

I nit.

Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or Separate Contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 1 0.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner. Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall pwceed promptly with changes in the Work. unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment. if any. in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions. deletions. or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

AlA DocumentA201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA., Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11106/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01124/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

23

I nit.

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs oflabor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers' compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.5Ifthe Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect ofthe Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certifY for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect's professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect's order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notifY the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect's order for a minor

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911. 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstttute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

24

I nit.

change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor's control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2Jfunit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy. required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's subsequent Applications for Payment.

AlA Document A201TM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961,1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'• Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution Of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

25

In it.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers ofliens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner· s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment. either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount ofthe Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notifY the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notifY the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment. that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has ( 1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the ex.tent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner. if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot

AlA Document A201 ™- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstrtute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11106/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

26

In it.

be made. If the Architect is unable to certifY payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notifY the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullifY the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notifY the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Appl.ication for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents. and shall so notifY the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account ofthe Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days. the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor's payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy ofthe Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

AlA Document A201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'0 Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

27

I nit.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss. liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney's fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

§ 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and startup, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9~8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such Jist does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct su~h item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment ofretainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor. provided such occupancy or use is consented

AlA DocumentA201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997. 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribUtion of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and wm be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the raw. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

28

I nit.

to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds theW ork acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief. and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.1 0.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, ifany, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers' warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims,

· security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AtA''' Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wit! be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on t 1/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

29

I nit.

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating. maintaining. and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of. and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons \vho may be afTected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with. and give notices required by applicable laws. statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations. and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement. erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 1 0.2.1.2 and 1 0.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 1 0.2.1.2 and I 0.2. 1 .3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

AlA Document A201'M -2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970. 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of ArchiTects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA•· Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at15:33:37 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. UserNotes: (389ADA52)

30

I nit.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect ofthe condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt ofthe Contractor's notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present. to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifYing the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims. damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 1 0.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss. or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than theW ork itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section I 0.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be detern1ined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits ofliability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The

AlA Document A201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civif and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw, This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not lor resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

31

I nit.

Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

§ 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall. unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner's Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance ofthe types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect ofthe Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (I) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. lfthe Contractor purchases replacement coverage. the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (I) each other and any of their subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents. and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect's consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any. and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds

AlA DocumentA20FM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33"37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

32

I nit.

of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor ofthe individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect's consultants. Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even. though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 1 1.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.

§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for Joss of use of the Owner's property, due to fire or other hazards however caused.

§11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms ofthe proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out ofthe settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

AlA Document A201 m- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civif and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

33

I nit.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of theW ork or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work. if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction ofWork shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction ofW ork as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the spt:cific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law ofthe place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction's choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section I 5.4.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent ofthe

AlA DocumentA201 rM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The American lnstttute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

34

I nit.

other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project. if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner. Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable Jaws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections. and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests. inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 Ifthe Architect, Owner, or public authorities havingjurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing. inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner's expense.

§ 13.4.3Ifprocedures for testing. inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place oftesting.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.

AlA Document A201'"- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA•' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wW be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not tor resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

35

I nit.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

. 1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees. or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than I 00 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justifY such action. the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' notice, terminate employment ofthe Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance ofthe Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work. including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance.

AlA DocumentA201™- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstttute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A IN' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/0612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

36

In it.

the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner. as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker. upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3 .I. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been. so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee. if any, set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking. as a matter of right, payment of money. a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term '"Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section I 5. I .1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of theW ork. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered priorto expiration of the period for correction ofthe Work set forth in Section 12.2.2. shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15 .1.3 .1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

AlA Document A201"'- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNlNG: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

37

I nit.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of theW ork set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim. except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9. 7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost lfthe Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 1 0.4.

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress ofthe Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 15.1. 7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income. profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation. to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article I 4. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 1 0.3, 1 0.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree. the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (I) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that. in the

AlA DocumentA201'M- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American lnstttute of Archrtects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion ol it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 1110612019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 0112412020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA52)

38

I nit.

Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (I) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date ofreceipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2. 7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. Ifthe Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the suQject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.1 0.4, 9.1 0.5, and 15.1. 7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the · other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

AlA Document A201 TM- 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925,1937, 19.51, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Archijects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document, or any portion o! it. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and wfll be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9AOA52)

39

I nit.

§ 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 Arbitration § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by. mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation. but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution oflegal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of !imitations. For statute oflimitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court havingjurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions oflaw or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules ofthe American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.

AlA Document A201"' - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 15:33:37 ET on 11/06/2019 under Order No. 5892285182 which expires on 01/24/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA52)

40

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 10 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution SUMMARY

SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: Informational Technology Center, Ground Loop Water Temp Solution. B. Owner's Name: The State Technical College of Missouri. C. Engineer’s Name: Timberlake Engineering.

1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document

00 52 00 - Agreement Form. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.

1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown:

1. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied. 2. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers

and fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 20 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard

form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment

Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to

Proceed. E. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section. For unit cost

Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item.

F. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.

G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard

form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Present required information in typewritten form. E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet

including continuation sheets when required. F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line

item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. H. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and

dollar amount as for an original item of Work. I. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. J. Include the following with the application:

1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01 30 00. 2. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 30 00. 3. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 4. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.

K. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.


1.04 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be

responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to the Contract Documents.

B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor.

C. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710.

D. Request For Information (RFI): Contractor shall submit RFI's for clarifications to the Contract Documents. In the RFI, the Contractor shall include the following: 1. The Drawing number/Specification Section, including grid reference/paragraph number, 2. The question regarding the item(s) referred to, 3. The Contractor's interpretation of the item(s) referred to.

E. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of

determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change.

F. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14 days.

G. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

H. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount

will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request

for a Change Order as approved by Architect. 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit

prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be

determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work.

5. The allowance for Overhead and Profit combined, including the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedules for change order adds and deducts: a. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10% of the

cost of labor and 5% of the cost of materials. b. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 5% of the

amount of the Subcontractor. c. For each Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any work performed by

that Subcontractor's own forces, 10% of the work cost. d. For each Subcontractor, for work performed by Subcontractor's Sub-subcontractors,

5% of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. e. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except

those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied


by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major costs items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also.

6. The allowance for Overhead and Profit shall account for ALL time associated with the change of scope. Compensation for time generating documents, reviewing documents, etc… will not be allowed.

7. The allowance for Payment and Performance Bond costs associated with change orders shall not exceed 1.5% and shall be used on both additive and deductive change orders.

I. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide the following data:

a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly

documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion

of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. J. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as

provided in the Conditions of the Contract. K. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for

Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum.

L. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.

M. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.05 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 78 00.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 30 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. D. Number of copies of submittals. E. Submittal procedures. F. Copies of Drawings and Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required:

1. Owner. 2. Engineer. 3. Contractor. 4. Subcontractors.

C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner- Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Owner, Contractor and

Architect. 6. Background checks. 7. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 8. Scheduling. 9. Use of the premises. 10. Special project requirements.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly

intervals, while work is ongoing. B. Engineer will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants,

preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,

Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.


7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Refer to Construction Progress Schedule Section 01 32 16. B. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.04 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic

(PDF) format and transmitted via Drop Box. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to

requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record.

2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format. 4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants are to be permitted to use the

service at no extra charge. 5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software

that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com).

6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be reviewed.

7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts.

B. Project Closeout: Upon completion of the project and close out documents all folders and files located in the Drop Box Project Folder shall be copied to a CD and two copies provided to the Architect.

3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports.


5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated to be for information only.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated.

B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that

Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. 2. Submit an additional copy of submittals to Architect for mechanical and electrical

engineering work, one of which will be retained by the engineer. 3. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit the number of opaque

reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect. 4. Submit an additional copy of submittals to Architect for mechanical and electrical

engineering work, one of which will be retained by the engineer. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed.

Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be

retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810.fill out portions to be completed be the Contractor. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a

sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number,

and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of

Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

E. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be

detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.


K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. M. Do not commence with Work that requires review of any submittals until receipt of returned,

unrejected submittals. N. One original copy of each submittal shall be available at the project site at all times. Do not

allow submittals without appropriate final action marking to be used for the project. O. Do not include requests for substitution on submittals: comply with procedures for substitution

specified in Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 32 16 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE


A. Preliminary schedule. B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned

operations for the Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 5 days. C. Within 10 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete

schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed

schedule. D. Within 5 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will

be retained by Owner. 1.03 SCHEDULE FORMAT

A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number.

B. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 3.02 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number. C. Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01 10 00. D. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule. E. Include conferences and meetings in schedule. F. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00. G. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 32 16 / 2 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

3.03 WEATHER DAYS A. The Contractor’s schedule shall anticipate normal local weather days on a month by month

basis. Suspension of construction activity for the number of days each month as listed below shall be included in the Work and is not eligible for extension of Contract Time:

1. January: 6 Days 2. February: 6 Days 3. March: 8 Days 4. April: 5 Days 5. May: 5 Days 6. June: 3 Days 7. July: 3 Days 8. August: 3 Days 9. September: 2 Days 10. October: 2 Days 11. November: 6 Days 12. December: 5 Days

3.04 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week.

3.05 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

3.06 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each

activity. C. Update diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other

identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.

3.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors,

suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in

schedules. END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 40 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Mock-ups. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection services. G. Manufacturers' field services.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants;

2008. B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2011c. C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012. D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the

Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a.

E. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2011.

F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the

limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Architect. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.


2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not

included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until

Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor

those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other

specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in

accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor shall coordinate all testing and inspections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.


D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.

Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.

3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract

Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor.

G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by PWArchitects, Inc.. Contractor shall be responsible for additional testing and costs.


3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will

direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 50 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Temporary utilities (electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water). B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Temporary fire protection and interim life safety requirements. G. Vehicular access and parking. H. Waste removal facilities and services. I. Project identification sign. J. Field offices.

1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for

construction purposes from Owner's existing sources. B. Temporary Electricity: Provide all extensions, wiring, safety accessories, and other

miscellaneous items as required for use of Owner's existing services. Do not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. 1. Provide disconnect at connection to service. 2. Temporary service shall comply with OSHA, Life Safety, and other applicable codes.

C. Temporary Water: Provide all extensions, piping, safety accessories, and other miscellaneous items as required for use of Owner's existing services. 1. Provide shut-off valve and required backflow preventers.

D. Temporary Heat, Cooling, and Ventilation: Provide temporary devices as needed to maintain specific conditions for construction operations. Provide all extensions, ductwork, safety accessories, and other miscellaneous items as required for use of Owner's existing services.

E. Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Provide general sevice lighting of wattage and illumination required for construction operations.

1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project

mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include:

1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary software and laser printer.

2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line. 3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster. 4. Facsimile Service: Minimum of one dedicated fax machine/printer, with dedicated phone

line. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures in designated area of project site. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.


1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas

that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. E. Provide protection of Owner's existing equipment.

1.06 FENCING A. Provide 8 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates

with locks. Gates shall be designated by Owner's representative. B. Barrier locations are shown on drawings.

1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate

acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

B. In addition to normal opening protection provide similar enclosure system due to phasing requirements.

1.08 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner-

occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. 1. Owner will require the General Contractor to contain all construction dust. Temporary

filters shall be provided at return air ducts. 2. Schedule construction of temporary partitions as described by Owner to avoid interference

with Owners" daily operations. 3. HVAC systems within temporary enclosures are required to have negative pressure,

supply grilles covered, and filters on the returns and exhaust to keep dust out of system. B. Construction: Dust partitions for full construction duration shall be constructed using metal

studs and plywood with seams and perimeters sealed with duct tape and made airtight. Dust partitions shall be insulated to reduce the transfer of sound. Dust partitions shall be fire rated as required by regulatory authorities. These partitions shall extend from floor to deck above. Doors in these partitions shall have gaskets, self-closing latching hardware with Best lockset, and damp or tacky walk-off mats on both sides of door. Where partition interferes with mechanical and electrical systems to remain consult with Owner for direction.

1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from

unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.

1.10 FIRE PROTECTION AND INTERIM LIFE SAFETY A. Provide facilities required by authorities having jurisdiction. Institute Intermediate Life Safety

Measures. 1.11 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.


B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Designated existing on-site drives may be used for construction traffic with approval from

Owner. E. Existing parking areas as agreed with owner may be used for construction parking. F. Contractor will be responsible for all damage to existing paving due to construction traffic.

Contractor will be required to properly repair all damaged paving to a suitable condition. The Contractor is advised to document existing conditions at the start of construction.

1.12 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and

orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Dispose of waste off-site periodically.

1.13 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign as allowed by Owner. Include Owner, Architect, Consultants

and others as deemed necessary. B. Erect on site at location established by Owner. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

1.14 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Provide Field Offices within the project site or as directed by Owner, equipped with

sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings with table and chairs to accommodate 10 people. C. Space shall be properly heated and cooled.

1.15 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion

inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 60 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of

manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of

utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. C. Motors: Refer to Mechanical Sections. Specific motor type is specified in individual specification

sections. D. Wiring Terminations: See Electrical Sections.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.


2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in

individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.

B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.

C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality

level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-

approval by authorities. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or

product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one

proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed

product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.

3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product. D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with

foreign matter.


H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 70 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre-installation meetings. C. Cutting and patching. D. Cleaning and protection. E. Starting of systems and equipment. F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. G. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. H. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Date and time work will be executed.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent

accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.

C. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.

D. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to

accommodate occupancy requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.


C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work

and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that demolition is complete in alterations areas and areas are ready from installation of new work.

C. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

D. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation work.

Replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked from salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals,

and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather

and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ducts and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.

E. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes.


F. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. G. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. H. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and

horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. Patch

work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

F. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.

G. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and request instructions.

I. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. J. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified

condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. K. Re-cover and refinish work that exposes mechanical and electrical work exposed accidentally

during the work. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.


3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

M. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and

dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.


3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate

work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary,

obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Engineer and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required

by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's

representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to

date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months. D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration

and instruction of owner personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual

with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for

additional data becomes apparent during instruction. G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that

specified in individual sections. 3.11 ABOVE CEILING INSPECTIONS

A. Coordinate with Architect and Engineers to perform an above ceiling punchlist prior to the ceiling grid installation. Notify Architect when all above ceiling work is properly done to schedule this punchlist.


B. Once the punchlist items are corrected or completed notify the Engineer to schedule a final review. No ceiling work shall start in rooms with deficiencies until the final review is complete and all items are corrected.

3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 23 05 93.

3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

B. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

D. Clean filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Engineer. 2. Provide copies to Owner.

B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.

C. Notify Engineer when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. 1. The Engineer will perform one inspection for Substantial Completion, upon the request of

the Contractor. a. If the Architect is unable to issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion because

the work is not considered to be substantially complete, the Contractor shall pay all subsequent inspection costs, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses.

2. Do not submit request for Substantial Completion until the following activities have been completed: a. Delivery of maintenance materials and tools. b. Demonstration of all equipment and systems. c. Instruction of Owner's personnel. d. Removal of temporary facilities and services. e. Change over to permanent locking systems. f. Final cleaning. g. The Owner has been informed of necessary procedures for changing over insurance

coverages. h. The Owner has been informed of procedures for changing over operations. i. The Owner has received occupancy and operating permits from all authorities having

jurisdiction. j. All activities specified to occur prior to Substantial Completion.

D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.


E. Owner will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 10 00. F. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with

requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G. Accompany Engineer on preliminary final inspection. H. Notify Engineer when work is considered finally complete. I. Complete items of work determined by Engineer's final inspection.

3.15 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one

year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.

C. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. Unless the individual specifications calls for a specific period.

D. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

F. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Informational Technology Center TE#15297 01 78 00 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for

Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. Submit one set of completed documents prior to submission of the 50% pay request. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection with comments. Revise content of all documents as required prior to final submission.

3. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products

installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:


1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.

2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors

and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and

data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and

systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:

1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for

insertion of data. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed.

C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and

sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.


J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and

control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities

to be maintained in storage. N. Include test and balancing reports. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of

described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic

covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this

Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system

description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,

Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data.

K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.


3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

END OF SECTION

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 220523.12 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Brass ball valves.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.

2. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

G. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.


3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Brass Ball Valves with Full Port and Brass Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Forged brass.

e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Brass.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP

ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.


3.3 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded

ends.

2. Two-piece, brass ball valves with full port and brass trim.

END OF SECTION 220523.12

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 220523.14 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.

2. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with

copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system


F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:




the following:

a. NIBCO INC.

b. Red-White Valve Corp.

c. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.

f. Disc: Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin

level.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Check Valvess: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP

ratings may be substituted.

C. End Connections:


1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered.

3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or

threaded end connections.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 220529 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

4. Fastener systems.

5. Pipe positioning systems.

6. Equipment supports.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate

with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate

with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.


2.4 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for

positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.


G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.



A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.


2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.


3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

O. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

P. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

END OF SECTION 220529

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 220553 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:



the following:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Brimar Industries, Inc.

c. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White.

4. Background Color: Black.

5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.


B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Brady Corporation.

2. Brimar Industries, Inc.

3. Seton Identification Products.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS




2. Brimar Industries, Inc.

3. Seton Identification Products.


B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and

proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.2 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Low-Pressure Compressed Air Piping:

a. Background: Safety blue.


b. Letter Colors: White.

2. High-Pressure Compressed Air Piping:

a. Background: Safety blue.


3. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green.


4. Sanitary Waste Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety green.

b. Letter Color: White.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 221116 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings

inside buildings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the

building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic

piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.


E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or

flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.



C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron.



2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

F. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.


2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



the following:

a. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

b. Wilkins.

c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:



the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.


B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600

and AWWA M41.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside

the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure

gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for

drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged

booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and

Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in

Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

S. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for

thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."


T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.

Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and

thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to

ASME B31.9.

G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.



A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.


E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.


4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.


8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.


3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges

instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.


d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping

to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:


1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

D. Under-building-slab, combined domestic water, building-service, and fire-service-main piping,

NPS 6 to NPS 12, shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved

joints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and

brazed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints.


G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and brazed joints.

H. Aboveground, combined domestic water-service and fire-service-main piping, NPS 6 to

NPS 12, shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved

joints.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230517 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Grout.

4. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain

ends and integral welded waterstop collar.


D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company.

B. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20-psig.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size.

4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B 633

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in nonfire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT.



the following:

a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

c. The Dow Chemical Company.


B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling)

formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.



the following:

a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without

sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke-Barrier

Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with

requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.


B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal-system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.



1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade: Steel-pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls Below Grade: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

4. Concrete Slabs Above Grade: Steel-pipe sleeves.

5. Interior Partitions: Galvanized-steel pipe sleeves.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230518 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230518 / 2 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons using new materials.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230523.12 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.

2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

3. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


(DN 250)Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system


E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

G. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that

allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.


H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece Brass Ball Valves with Full Port and Brass Trim:


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Forged brass.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE.

h. Stem: Brass.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION








A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:



end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim.

3.4 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230523.14 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Iron swing check valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.

2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

3. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.

4. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


C. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system


D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

E. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats, Class 125:



the following:

a. Crane; a Crane brand.

b. Stockham; a Crane brand.


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Composition.

h. Seat Ring: Bronze.

i. Disc Holder: Bronze.

j. Disc: PTFE.

k. Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin

level.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring; resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:



end option is indicated in valve schedules.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules.

6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.4 HYDRONIC AND GROUND-LOOP HEAT-PUMP PIPING WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Iron Valves:

1. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Iron swing check valves with nonmetallic-to-metal seats,

Class 125.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230529 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.


3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

4. Fastener systems.



A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following; include Product Data for components:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:


1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate

with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate

with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient

air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for



A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.


B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange

for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated

trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger


and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.



3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.


B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING


after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting"

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply


3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.


E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile

environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes

NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230553 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Carlton Industries, LP.

c. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White.

4. Background Color: Black.

5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the

size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.


B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


2. Carlton Industries, LP.

3. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



2. Carlton Industries, LP.

3. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and

proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.


7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping: White letters on a safety-purple background.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 230923.11 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CONTROL VALVES

SECTION 230923.11 - CONTROL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control valves and actuators for DDC systems.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" control equipment and

software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire, and

cable.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

2. Include diagrams for pneumatic signal and main air tubing.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

D. Determine control valve sizes and flow coefficients by ISA 75.01.01.

E. Control valve characteristics and rangeability shall comply with ISA 75.11.01.

F. Selection Criteria:


1. Control valves shall be suitable for operation at following conditions:

a. Ground Source Loop Water: psi, 40-120 deg. F.

b. Condenser Water: psi, 0-120 deg. F.

2. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ground Source Loop Water: Open.

b. Condenser Water: Open.

3. Minimum Cv shall be calculated at 10 percent of design flow, with a coincident pressure

differential equal to the system design pump head.

4. In water systems, select modulating control valves at terminal equipment for a design Cv

based on a pressure drop of 5 psig at design flow unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 BUTTERFLY-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Commercial-Grade, Three-Way Butterfly Valves:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Arrangement: Two valves mated to a fabricated tee with interconnecting mechanical

linkage.

3. Performance:

a. Bi-directional bubble tight shutoff at 250 psig.

b. Comply with MSS SP-67 or MSS SP-68.

c. Rotation: Zero to 90 degrees.

d. Linear or modified equal percentage flow characteristic.

4. Body: Cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, ductile iron ASTM A536 or cast steel

ASTM A216/A216M WCB fully lugged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5 flanges.

5. Disc: 316 stainless steel.

6. Shaft: 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel.

7. Seat: Reinforced EPDM or reinforced PTFE seat with retaining ring.

8. Shaft Bushings: Reinforced PTFE or stainless steel.

9. Replaceable seat, disc, and shaft bushings.

10. Corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

b. Body size.

c. Body and trim materials.

d. Flow arrow.

2.3 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS

A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

B. Actuators for Hydronic Control Valves: Capable of closing valve against system pump shutoff

head.


C. Position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator.

D. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

E. Deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled device from limit to

limit when operated at rated voltage.

F. Function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate voltage.

G. Construction:

1. For Actuators Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper

alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. For Actuators from 100 to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft hardened steel

running in bronze, copper alloy or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally

enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel or cast-aluminum housing.

3. For Actuators Larger Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with

auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

H. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring Return Actuators: Easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field

without replacement.

2. Gear Type Actuators: External manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual

positioning when the actuator is not powered.

I. Modulating Actuators:

1. Operation: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either

direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control Input, Position Feedback, and Running Time: Factory or field

programmable.

2) Diagnostic: Feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload,

mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service Data: Include, at a minimum, number of hours powered and number

of hours in motion.

J. Position Feedback:

1. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and

closed travel limits.

K. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position.

2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power.

3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.


L. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions.

2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

M. Valve Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for valve interface, provide an actuator designed to be directly

coupled to valve shaft without the need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to valve drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and

torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two

points of attachment.

N. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with

minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating

range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

O. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application.

2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications.

3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications.

4. Provide actuator enclosure with heater and control where required by application.

P. Stroke Time:

1. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.

Q. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Control Valves:

1. Select from valves specified in "Control Valves" Article to achieve performance

requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system

operation encountered.

2. Three Way, Controlled by Temperature: Butterfly-style valves, commercial-grade, three-

way valves.


3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduits to comply with requirements

indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment.

D. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before

proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that

could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent

condition.

E. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies and seal penetrations made in acoustically

rated assemblies.

F. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force

or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

G. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance

from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access,

confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

3.3 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed

Switches and Circuit Breakers."

C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as

possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with

manufacturer-recommended clearance.

B. Install flanges or unions to allow drop-in and -out valve installation.


C. Install pressure temperature taps in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve

larger than NPS 2.

D. Valve Orientation:

1. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

2. Where possible, install butterfly valves that are installed in horizontal piping with stems

in horizontal position and with low point of disc opening with direction of flow.

E. Clearance:

1. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be

handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install valves with at least 12 inches of clear space around valve and between valves and

adjacent surfaces.

F. Threaded Valves:

1. Note internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall,

to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

2. Align threads at point of assembly.

3. Apply thread compound to external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is

specified.

4. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Apply wrench on valve end as pipe is being threaded.

G. Flanged Valves:

1. Align flange surfaces parallel.

2. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten

bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

H. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with

requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

I. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and

tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at

points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

J. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with valve identification on valve.

3.5 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check valves for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check valves for proper installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

4. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.


5. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

6. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

7. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

8. Verify that valve disc travel is unobstructed.

9. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace

the valve if leaks persist.

3.6 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100

percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than

30 seconds.

C. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple

positions to confirm proper position indication.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 232113 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HYDRONIC PIPING

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping.

2. Chilled-water piping.

3. Condensate-drain piping.

4. Air-vent piping.

5. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.




A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,

products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.

2. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

3. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to

which it is attached.


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.




the following:

a. Anvil International.

b. Star Pipe Products.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting.

Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, EPDM gasket rated for

minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and

wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping

Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping

Applications" Article.

D. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

E. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:



the following:

a. Anvil International.

b. Star Pipe Products.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,

Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated

steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders

constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking

toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.


3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and EPDM gasket of central cavity

pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure

grooved pipe and fittings.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining

copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working

temperatures and pressures.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



the following:

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

c. Wilkins.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.


b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

2. Schedule 40, Grade B, Type 96 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron

flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

C. Hot-Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper

copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints.

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints.

E. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

F. Chilled-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper copper

tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints.

G. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings,

and soldered joints.

H. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic

piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

I. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining

methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-

plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written

instructions.


3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination

Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple

with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains usingtee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to

the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping,"

Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for

HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15

"Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere

as indicated.


S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC

Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment

guides.

U. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"

for identifying piping.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements

for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet.

3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet.

4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet.


5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet.

6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll

grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe

wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment

connections.


B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are

installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply

with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains

installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to

pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building

Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.

3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.


6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 232116 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:

1. Air-control devices.

2. Strainers.

3. Connectors.


1. Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for ball valves common to most piping systems.

2. Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for check valves common to most piping systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Hydronic Specialty Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on

manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control

valves.

2. Air-control devices.

3. Strainers

4. Connectors.




A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.

Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:




the following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

c. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze.

3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.

7. CWP Rating: 150 psig.

8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

B. Expansion Tanks:



the following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.


2. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum

operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank

for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested after taps are fabricated and shall be labeled

according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

3. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and

stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter.

Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating

temperature.

4. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and

240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank,

drain water, and close off system.

5. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- diameter gage glass,

and slotted-metal glass guard.

C. In-Line Air Separators:



the following:

a. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

b. Spirotherm, Inc.



2. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to

maximize air separation.

3. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.

4. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.

2.2 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket.


2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection

to each piece of equipment.

B. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

C. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to

the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

D. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting.


B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2

percent upward slope toward tank.

C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and

larger.

D. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that

tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 232123 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HYDRONIC PUMPS

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS



1. Bell & Gossett, a Xylem company.

2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,

end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump

and motor shafts horizontal.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Maximum Operating Pressure: 175 psig.

2. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

3. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 460.


b. Phase: Three.

c. Hertz: 60.

D. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage

tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged

connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,

and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim

impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Ceramic / EPT mechanical seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

E. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.

EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

F. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;

removable; attached to mounting frame.

G. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from

ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and

motor.

H. Motor: Variable speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

b. Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings.

c. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

2.2 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.

3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers.

4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes.

5. Drain plug.

6. Factory-fabricated support.


B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.

3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,

couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and

weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open

drain.

E. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

3.2 ALIGNMENT

A. Perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor

shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between

motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill

baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in

place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping", Section

232113.33 Ground-Loop Heat-Pump Piping, and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping

Specialties."


B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

D. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

E. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

F. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

G. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

H. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between

pump casing and valves.

I. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or

install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

K. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 232300 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution REFRIGERANT PIPING

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings.

2. Refrigerants.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and refrigerant piping specialty.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in

maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-134a:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 115 psig.

2. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 225 psig.

B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C:




C. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:




A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-

long assembly.

4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.


G. Copper Pressure-Seal Fitting for Refrigerant Piping:



the following:

a. Conex Banninger.

b. Parker Hannifin, Sporlan Division.

2. Standard: UL 207; certified by UL for field installation. Certification as a UL-recognized

component alone is unacceptable.

3. Housing: Copper.

4. O-Rings: HNBR or compatible with specific refrigerant.

5. Tools: Manufacturer's approved special tools.

6. Minimum Rated Pressure: 700 psig

2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.




the following:

a. Arkema Inc.

b. DuPont Fluorochemicals Div.

c. Mexichem Fluor Inc.

B. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.



the following:

a. Arkema Inc.



C. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.



the following:

a. Arkema Inc.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Suction Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with

brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or

panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment

requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical

injury.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion-valve bulb.

P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

Q. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."


T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for seismic restraints in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

G.




1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

B. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

C. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.


D. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 235700 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plate heat exchangers.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Plate-and-Frame Type: One year(s).


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS



1. Armstrong Fluid Technology.

2. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett.

3. API Heat Transfer Inc.

B. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying and

guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and one-piece

gaskets.

C. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

D. Frame:

1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.

E. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or stainless steel.

1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with reinforcement

strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-

exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.

F. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel.

G. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel.

H. Plate Material: 0.024 inch thick before stamping; Type 304 stainless steel.

I. Gasket Materials: Nitrile rubber.

J. Piping Connections:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-

steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

K. Enclose plates in solid aluminum removable shroud.

L. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Heat-Exchanger Surface Area: 981 sq. ft..

2. Number of Plates: 149.

3. Number of Passes: One.

4. Heat Exchanged: 2,383,700 Btu/h.

5. Operating Weight: 3368 lb.


6. Building Side:

a. Fluid: Water.

7. Fluid cooler Side:

a. Fluid: Water with 30 percent propylene glycol.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating

before shipment.

B. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

B. Install metal shroud over installed gasketed-plate heat exchanger according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

C. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and

Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of

piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat

exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.

E. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

F. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full

size of valve connection, to floor drain.

G. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on

heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping.

H. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping.




1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed

finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 236514.16 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution CLOSED-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS

SECTION 236514.16 – CLOSED-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING

TOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes factory-assembled, closed-circuit, induced-draft, counterflow cooling towers.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manufacturer's drawings of assembled cooling towers, control panels, sections, and

elevations.

2. Diagram showing each separate piece requiring field assembly.

3. Shipped sub-assembly dimensions and weights for field assembly.

4. Operating weight and load distribution.

5. Unit vibration isolation.

6. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.

7. Sizes and dimensioned locations of piping and wiring connections.

8. Diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Field test reports.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample warranty.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI.


B. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201RS.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cooling towers that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Baltimore Aircoil Company.

2. EVAPCO, Inc.

3. Recold.


A. Structural Performance: Cooling tower and support structure shall withstand the effects of loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Seismic Performance: Cooling towers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


E. Operation Following Loss of Normal Power:

1. Equipment, associated factory- and field-installed controls, and associated electrical

equipment and power supply connected to backup power system shall automatically

return equipment and associated controls to the operating state occurring immediately

before loss of normal power without need for manual intervention by an operator when

power is restored either through a backup power source, or through normal power if

restored before backup power is brought on-line.

2. Include means and methods required to satisfy requirement even if not explicitly

indicated.


F. Vibration:

1. Rotating assemblies shall be dynamically balanced to achieve a balance level of "good"

while complying with industry standard requirements for cooling towers.

2. Critical speed shall be at least 115 percent of design speed.

2.3 DESIGN ARRANGEMENT

A. Counterflow design with airflow from all sides and induced-draft, top-mounted axial fan and

pressurized pipe distribution.

2.4 CASING AND FRAME

A. Casing Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G235 coating.

B. Frame Material: materials to match casing.

C. Hardware: Galvanized steel.

D. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.

E. Welded Connections: Sealed watertight.

2.5 COLLECTION BASIN

A. Factory-Assembled Collection Basin:

1. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G235 coating.

2. Hardware: Galvanized steel.

3. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.

4. Welded Connections: Sealed watertight.

5. Removable stainless-steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.

6. Overflow and drain connections.

7. Makeup-water connection.

8. Outlet Connection: Configured to mate to ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange.

2.6 COLLECTION BASIN MAKEUP-WATER ASSEMBLY

A. Mechanically Operated, Collection Basin Water-Level Control: Manufacturer's standard

adjustable, mechanical float assembly and valve.

2.7 PRESSURIZED DISTRIBUTION NETWORK

A. Main header and lateral branch piping designed for even distribution over heat-exchanger coils

throughout the entire flow range without the need for balancing valves and for connecting

individual, easily removable, nonclogging spray nozzles.


B. Pipe Material: Schedule 40 PVC.

C. Spray Nozzle Material: Plastic.

D. Piping Supports: Corrosion-resistant hangers and supports to resist movement during operation

and shipment.

2.8 HEAT-EXCHANGER COILS

A. Tube and Tube Sheet Materials: carbon-steel tube and sheet with outer surface of tube and

sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

B. Heat-Exchanger Arrangement:

1. Serpentine tubes; sloped for complete drainage of fluid by gravity.

2. Tubes with extended surface fins if required to achieve performance indicated.

C. Field Piping Connections: Vent, supply, and return suitable for mating to ASME B16.5,

Class 150 flange.

2.9 DRIFT ELIMINATORS

A. Material: PVC; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

B. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.

C. Arrangement: Multiple, easily removable sections.

D. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to 0.001 percent of

design flow rate indicated.

E. Hardware: Galvanized steel.

2.10 AIR INLET

A. Air-Intake Louvers:

1. Material: PVC.

2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.

3. Multiple, easily removable sections arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to

minimize air resistance, to block direct sunlight, and to prevent water from splashing out

of tower during all modes of operation including operation with fans off.

B. Hardware: Galvanized steel.


2.11 FAN AND DRIVE ASSEMBLY

A. Axial Fan: Balanced at the factory.

1. Blade Material: Aluminum.

2. Fan Shaft: Corrosion resistant.

3. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning ball or roller bearings with moisture-proof seals and

premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus

300 deg F. Bearings designed for an L-10 life of 50,000 hours.

4. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location.

B. Belt Drive:

1. Service Factor: 1.5 based on motor nameplate horsepower.

2. Sheaves: Fan and motor shafts shall have taper-lock sheaves fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials.

3. Belt: One-piece, multigrooved, solid-back belt.

4. Belt Material: Oil resistant, nonstatic conducting, and constructed of neoprene polyester

cord.

5. Belt-Drive Guard: Comply with OSHA regulations.

C. Fan Motor:

1. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Description: NEMA MG 1, as required to comply with capacity and torque

characteristics; medium induction motor.

3. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected

loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating

sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

4. Motor Enclosure: totally enclosed.

5. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

6. Energy Efficiency: NEMA Premium Efficient.

7. Service Factor: 1.15.

8. Temperature Rise: One class lower than insulation rating.

9. Insulation: Class F.

10. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG 1, Section IV, "Performance

Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-Fed, Polyphase

Motors."

11. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension.

12. Motor Shaft Grounding: Motors shall be controlled through variable-frequency

controllers with shaft grounding system to protect motor bearings from induced voltage.

Drag on motor shaft due to shaft ground system shall be less than 0.5 percent of motor

nameplate horsepower.

D. Hardware: Galvanized steel.

2.12 AIR DISCHARGE

A. Fan Discharge Stack:


1. Manufacturer's standard low-profile design.

2. Material: Material to match casing.

3. Stack Termination: Wire-mesh, galvanized-steel screens; segmented into multiple

removable pie sections and complying with OSHA regulations.

B. Hardware: Galvanized steel.

2.13 RECIRCULATING WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A. Pump: Close-coupled, single-stage, centrifugal pump; with mechanical seal and suitable for

outdoor service. Factory install pump with following:

1. Flanges at pump connections to piping.

2. Strainer installed in piping on suction side of pump.

3. Flow balancing valve in piping on discharge side of pump.

B. Pump Motor:

1. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Description: NEMA MG 1, as required to comply with capacity and torque

characteristics; medium induction motor.

3. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected

loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating

sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

4. Motor Enclosure: totally enclosed.

5. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

6. Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

7. Service Factor: 1.15.

8. Temperature Rise: One class lower than insulation rating.

9. Insulation: Class F.

C. Piping: Interconnecting collection basin to pump and pressurization distribution system.

1. Design delegated to manufacturer.

2. External to and supported from cooling tower casing and frame.

3. Material: Corrosion resistant.

4. Install flanges at connections to collection basin and pressurized distribution system.

5. Drain connection with isolation valve at piping low point if piping does not drain directly

into collection basin.

D. Piping: Field installed for connection to remotely installed pump and water storage that are not

furnished with cooling tower.

2.14 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Factory Furnish for Field Installation: A control center with single-point power connection for

fan variable-frequency controller, fan bypass controller, pump motor controller, and associated

statuses and alarms. All read-write and read-only controls points shall be integrated into the

owner’s existing DDC control system.


B. Pump Motor Controller:

1. NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full-voltage, non-reversing, motor-rated controller.

2. Configured for control of single- or multispeed motors as indicated.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R, with hinged full-front access door with lock and key.

4. Externally Operated, Disconnect: Fused disconnect switch with lockable handle.

5. SCCR shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than

42,000 A.

6. Hand-Off-Auto Switch: Mounted on face of enclosure.

7. Push-to-Test Run Status Pilot Lights: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

8. Control Relays: Time-delay relays.

9. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with

adjustable undervoltage setting and isolated output contacts for hardwired connection.

C. Fan Variable-Frequency Controller:

1. Description: NEMA ICS 2; arranged to achieve motor variable speed by adjusting output

voltage and frequency.

2. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R, with hinged full-front access door with

lock and key.

3. Externally Operated, Door-Interlocked Disconnect: Circuit breaker with lockable handle.

4. Minimum SCCR shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less

than 42,000 A.

5. Technology: Pulse-width-modulated (PWM) output with insulated gate bipolar transistors

(IGBT); suitable for variable torque loads.

6. Controller shall consist of a rectifier converter section, a digital/analog driver regulator

section, and an inverter output section.

7. Output Rating: Three phase; with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage

range.

8. Output signal shall be programmed to not cause mechanical vibration issues with fan

drive assembly.

9. Operating Requirements:

a. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: 10 percent.

b. Input frequency tolerance of 60 Hz, plus or minus 2 Hz.

c. Capable of driving full motor load, without derating.

d. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

e. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 95 percent.

f. Overload Capability: 1.05 times the full-load current for 7 seconds.

g. Starting Torque: As required by fan and motor drive assembly.

h. Speed Regulation: 1 percent.

i. Speed Range: 10:1 speed range.

j. To avoid equipment resonant vibrations, include critical speed lockout circuitry to

allow bands of operating frequency at which controller shall not operate

continuously.

k. Capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in either the forward or reverse

direction without tripping.

10. Controller Adjustability Capabilities: Minimum and maximum output frequency,

acceleration and deceleration, and current limit.


11. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: Subjecting the controller to any of the following

conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for replacement:

a. Overtemperature.

b. Short circuit at controller output.

c. Ground fault at controller output. Variable-frequency controller shall be able to

start a grounded motor.

d. Open circuit at controller output.

e. Input undervoltage.

f. Input overvoltage.

g. Loss of input phase.

h. Reverse phase.

i. AC line switching transients.

j. Instantaneous overload, line to line or line to ground.

k. Sustained overload exceeding 100 percent of controller rated current.

l. Starting a rotating motor.

12. Motor Protection: Controller shall protect motor against overvoltage and undervoltage,

phase loss, reverse phase, overcurrent, overtemperature, and ground fault.

13. Automatic Reset and Restart:

a. Capable of multiple restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an

interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction.

b. Capable of automatic restart on phase-loss and overvoltage and undervoltage trips.

14. Visual Indication: On face of controller; indicating the following conditions:

a. Power on.

b. Run.

c. Overcurrent and overvoltage.

d. Motor speed (percent).

e. Various faults with alarm status.

f. Input kilovolt amperes.

g. Power factor.

h. Input kilowatts and kilowatt-hours.

i. Three-phase input and output voltage.

j. Three-phase input and output current.

k. Output frequency.

l. Elapsed operating time (hours).

m. Diagnostic and service parameters.

15. Operator Interface: Start-stop and auto-manual selector with manual-speed-control

potentiometer.

16. Control Signal Interface: A minimum of two analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4 to 20 mA)

and four programmable digital inputs.

17. Fan Bypass Controller:

a. Integrated NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full-voltage, non-reversing, motor-rated

controller to operate fan motor if variable-frequency controller is not operational.


b. Configure power supply to bypass controller and variable-frequency controller to

completely isolate power to variable-frequency controller while operating fan

motor through bypass controller for safe servicing of variable-frequency controller.

c. Include "Bypass/VFC" manual selector switch on face of enclosure for local

operator control of preferred controller.

d. Include fail-safe control logic to automatically transfer fan motor operation from

failed variable-frequency controller to bypass controller.

e. Install bypass controller in same enclosure as variable-frequency controller.

2.15 CONTROLS

A. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set point in a

range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower

manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection.

3. Switch shall have field connection to a control system hardwired connection to fan motor

electrical circuit.

4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm for connection to control

system and shut down the fan.

2.16 SERVICE ACCESS

A. Doors:

1. Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal components.

2. Doors shall be hinged with handles operable from both sides of the door.

3. Door materials shall match casing.

4. Hinges and handles shall be corrosion resistant.

B. External Ladders with Handrails: Corrosion-resistant metal, fixed ladders with ladder

extensions to access external platforms and top of cooling tower from adjacent grade without

the need for portable ladders. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.

C. Hardware: Galvanized steel when connecting galvanized-steel components; stainless steel when

connecting other materials.

2.17 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Number of Cells: 1.

B. Air-Inlet Arrangement: One side.

C. Maximum Drift Loss: 0.005 percent of design water flow.

D. Heat Exchanger:


1. Fluid Type: Water with 30% propylene glycol.

2. Design Fluid Flow per Cell: 502 gpm.

3. Fluid Pressure Drop: 8.5 psig.

4. Entering-Fluid Temperature: 90 deg F.

5. Leaving-Fluid Temperature: 80 deg F.

6. Entering-Air Wet-Bulb Temperature: 75 deg F.

7. Airflow per Cell: 115,790 cfm.

E. Fan Drive Assembly:

1. Type: Belt.

2. Fan Motor:

a. Type: TEAO, Inverter-Duty fan motors, furnished in accordance with NEMA

Standard MG.1 – Part 31.

b. Motor Sizes: 20 hp and 10 hp.

c. Electrical Characteristics: 480-V ac, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

F. Pump and Motor:

1. Water Flow per Cell: 859 gpm.

2. Motor Size per Cell: 7.5 hp.

3. Electrical Characteristics: 480-V ac, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

G. Sound Pressure Level: 82 dBA at 5 feet on air inlet side when measured according to

CTI ATC 128.

2.18 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Performance Test: Factory test and certify cooling tower performance according to

CTI STD 201RS, "Standard for the Certification of Water-Cooling Tower Thermal

Performance."

B. Heat-Exchanger Factory Pressure and Leak Tests:

1. Pneumatically test heat-exchanger assembly while submerged underwater and prove to be

free of leaks.

2. Test pressure equal to 1.5 times rated pressured.

3. Submit report documenting test and results.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine cooling towers before installation. Reject cooling towers that are damaged.

B. Install cooling towers on support structure.

C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.


D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Maintain clearances required by governing code.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to cooling towers, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration

isolators.

D. Install drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping.

E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.

F. Makeup-Water Piping:

1. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

2. Connect to makeup-water connections with shutoff valve, plugged tee with pressure

gage,[ flow meter,] and drain connection with valve and union.

G. Supply and Return Piping:

1. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and

Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

2. Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, plugged tee with full

port ball valve for portable field instruments, and drain connection with valve.

3. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve thermometer, plugged tee

with full port ball valve for portable field instruments, and drain connection with valve.

4. Make connections to cooling tower with a flange.

3.3 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"

for grounding connections.

C. Install nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and

circuit number feeding connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with

engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. Locate nameplate where easily visible.


3.4 CONTROLS CONNECTIONS

A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring between cooling towers and other equipment to interlock operation as

required to achieve a complete and functioning system.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105.

E. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping; controls; and electrical

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and perform the following:

a. Clean entire unit including basins.

b. Verify that accessories are properly installed.

c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.

d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.

e. Lubricate bearings.

f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and correct

problems.

g. Verify pump rotation for correct direction, vibration, cavitation, and flow and

correct problems.

h. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.

i. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for harmonic

vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal

vibration.

j. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.

k. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup-

water-level control and valve.


l. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower or HVAC

air intakes. Recommend corrective action.

m. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.

D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting

procedures.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.

B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

C. Adjust basin heater control for proper operating set point.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 260519 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Aluminum building wire rated 600 V or less.

3. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

4. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor

cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 601 to

35,000 V.

2. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.



B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. American Bare Conductor.

2. Encore Wire Corporation.

3. Southwire Company.


C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 ALUMINUM BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn aluminum current-carrying conductor

with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.






C. Standards:



2. RoHS compliant.



D. Conductors: Aluminum, complying with ASTM B 800 and ASTM B 801.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN: Comply with UL 83.


2.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an

overall metallic sheath.







C. Standards:



2. Comply with UL 1569.

3. RoHS compliant.



D. Circuits:

1. Single circuit.

2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

for stranded conductors.

F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

G. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.


H. Armor: Aluminum, interlocked.

2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.



1. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

2. ILSCO.

3. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4

AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8

AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2,

single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

I. Whips to Individual Light Fixtures, no greater than 6 feet in length: Metal-clad cable,

Type MC.

J.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.


B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."


3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 260526 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless

otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.


B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 5/8 by 96 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG

minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.


5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment

grounding bar terminal on busway.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,

humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct

and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with

branch-circuit conductors.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and

UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system

ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical

service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode

conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

and at most two-rod lengths from each other and located at least the same distance from

other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.


3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of

accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 260529 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the

applied force.


A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.



the following:

a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. ERICO International Corporation.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for


a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials in which used.


a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Hilti, Inc.

3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in

diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding

specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above

suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.


Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than

4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.


1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING


after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply



The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 260533 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Die cast.

b. Type: Setscrew.


3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise

indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.


4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

K. Gangable boxes are allowed.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

d. Gymnasiums.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic

in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.


1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew, cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

F. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

H. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.


J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

K. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

L. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of

flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

N. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

P. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

Q. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

R. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

S. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

T. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

U. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:


1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in

nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."


3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 260553 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for conductor and communication- and control- cable.

2. Warning labels and signs.

3. Equipment identification labels.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION

MATERIALS

A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:


1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray

background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band

shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in

contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,

at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested

areas.

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches

overall.

G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation

and paint application.


3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and

pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend

and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.

2. Power.

3. UPS.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors

using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of

access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless

otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in

finished spaces.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.


I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs

with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is

provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise

indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch-

high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine label 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of

the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.

c. Disconnect switches.

d. Enclosed circuit breakers.

e. Contactors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to

the location and substrate.

F. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for

ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied.


2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum

distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.

Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands

to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 262416 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution PANELBOARDS

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

B. SPD: Surge protective device.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.


A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.




1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.

2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy.

4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all panelboards from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in

Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts

and shall have no exposed hardware.

F. Incoming Mains Location: Convertible between top and bottom.


G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

I. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having

jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and

overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards shall have meter enclosures, wiring, connections,

and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact

requirements.

J. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and

necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or

manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an

NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.

2.4 POWER PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

B. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release

for removal.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release

for removal.


2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing

adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

5. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.

6. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.

c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings.

d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting

circuits.

f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

g. Shunt Trip: 24-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent

of rated voltage.

h. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position.

i. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on

position.


2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with

transparent protective cover.

2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

E. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back

box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,

and connections to separate ground bars.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning

signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room

designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.

Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air

circuit breakers stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance

with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 262816 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

4. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.










PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES




2. General Electric Company.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc.

4. Square D.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle

with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES






4. Square D.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.


2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS






4. Square D.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with

interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and

instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for

circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following

field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

F. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting

circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type

with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay

settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-

sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.


5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless


B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 262913.03 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

SECTION 262913.03 - MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Enclosed reduced-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

2. Enclosures.

3. Accessories.

4. Identification.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of magnetic controller.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for signal, and control

wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate

installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and

circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.






A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label magnetic motor controllers to comply with UL 508 and

UL 60947-4-1.

C. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate motor controllers to comply with ICS 2.

2.2 ENCLOSED REDUCED-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Electrically held; closed-transition; adjustable time delay on transition, 600-V ac or

less.



1. Eaton.

2. Rockwell Automation, Inc.

3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

C. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

D. Configuration:

1. Wye-Delta Controller: Four contactors, with a three-phase starting resistor/reactor bank.

2. Part-Winding Controller: Separate START and RUN contactors, field-selectable for 1/2-

or 2/3-winding start mode, with either six- or nine-lead motors; with separate overload

relays for starting and running sequences.

3. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: Medium-duty service, with integral

overtemperature protection; taps for starting at 50, 65, and 80 percent of line voltage; two

START and one RUN contactors.

E. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors when indicated.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

F. Control Power: 24-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with

CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

G. Overload Relays:

1. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection.

b. Sensors in each phase.


c. Class II Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053 to interrupt low-level

ground faults. The ground-fault detection system shall include circuitry that will

prevent the motor controller from tripping when the fault current exceeds the

interrupting capacity of the controller. Equip with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting, and a trip indicator.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with

environmental conditions at installed location.

B. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in

controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, except as needed to

match enclosure type. Heavy-duty or oil-tight where indicated in the controller schedule.

a. Push Buttons: As indicated in the controller schedule.

b. Pilot Lights: As indicated in the controller schedule.

2. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; resettable.

3. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and

plus or minus two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switches with an

off position.

B. Motor protection relays shall be with solid-state sensing circuit and isolated output contacts for

hardwired connections.

1. Phase-failure.

2. Phase-reversal, with bicolor LED to indicate normal and fault conditions. Automatic reset

when phase reversal is corrected.

3. Under/overvoltage, operate when the circuit voltage reaches a preset value, and drop out

when the operating voltage drops to a level below the preset value. Include adjustable

time-delay setting.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Controller Nameplates: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as described in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems," for each compartment, mounted with

corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Arc-Flash Warning Labels:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (89-by-127-mm) self-adhesive equipment label for each work


location included in the analysis. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied

markings.

a. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-

FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly

from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

1) Location designation.

2) Nominal voltage.

3) Flash protection boundary.

4) Hazard risk category.

5) Incident energy.

6) Working distance.

7) Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

b. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install magnetic controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels

bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install controllers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).

Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.

E. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and

distribution spools.

F. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as

shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for

motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Inspect contactors:

1) Verify mechanical operation.

2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to

manufacturer's published data.

f. Motor-Running Protection:

1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application.

2) If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance

values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate

from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the

lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to

manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published

data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving

and sliding surfaces.

3. Electrical Tests:

a. Test motor protection devices according to manufacturer's published data.

b. Test circuit breakers as follows:

1) Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

2) For adjustable circuit breakers, adjust protective device settings according to

the coordination study. Comply with coordination study recommendations.

c. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.

C. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS

A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action

devices. Perform system function tests after field quality control tests have been completed and

all components have passed specified tests.

1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for the purpose of evaluating performance of

integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design requirements

and manufacturer's published data.

2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition

to design function.

3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

B. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass the system function tests and

inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.


The State Technical College of Missouri Information Technology Center TE#15297 261519 / 1 Ground Loop Water Temp Solution LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 261519 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

2. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and

contactors.

2. Section 260926 "Lighting Control Panelboards" for panelboards used for lighting control.

3. Section 260933 "Central Dimming Controls" or Section 260936.19 "Standalone

Multipreset Modular Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems and for

fluorescent dimming controls with dimming ballasts specified in interior lighting

Sections.

4. Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23

"Relay-Based Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-

voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation.

B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



A. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

B. Sample warranty.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Cooper Lighting.

2. Columbia Lighting; Hubbell Lighting Incorporated.

3. H. E. Williams, Inc.

4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of light fixture and associated supports from single source

from single manufacturer.

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3500 K.

D. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.


G. Replaceable lamps and drivers.

H. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120-277 V ac.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

I. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.

2. Clear powder-coat finish.

J. Lumen Output: No less than 95 percent and no more than 100 percent of lumen output of basis

of design fixtures.

K. Power Consumption (watts): No more than 105 percent of power consumption of basis of

design fixtures.

2.3 DOWNLIGHT

A. Aperture: 6 inch.

B. Universal mounting bracket.

C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.4 CHAIN-HUNG SURFACE WRAP

A. Acrylic lens.

B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers, and Globes:

1. Prismatic acrylic, diffuse acrylic, or clear, UV-stabilized acrylic as scheduled.

2. Acrylic: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and

other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.


3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

D. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.

2. Clear powder-coat finish.

2.6 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining

components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish

same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: Secured to outlet box.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:


1. Ceiling mount with four-point pendant mount with 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable

supports adjustable to 120 inches in length.

2. Ceiling mount with hook mount.

H. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire

oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire

support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each

end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods

to building structure.

I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure luminaire using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near

corners of luminaire.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.

K. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

